COOPER
COOPER S
JOHN COOPER
WORKS
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It
contains important information on vehicle operation that will
help you make full use of the technical features available in your
MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
Set off now and have fun with your MINI.
The MINI Team of BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/15, 03 15 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Addendum
ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL
We wanted to provide you with some updates
and clarifications with respect to the printed
MINI Owner's Manual. These updates and clari-
fications will supersede the materials contained
in that document.
1. Where the terms “service center,” “the ser-
vice center,” “your service center,” “service
specialist,” or “service” are used in the Ow-
ner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that the
terms refer to a MINI dealer's service center
or another service center or repair shop that
employs trained personnel that can perform
maintenance and repair work on your ve-
hicle in accordance with MINI specifications.
2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual con-
tains an affirmative instruction to contact a
“service center” or “your service center,” we
wanted to clarify that MINI recommends
that, if you are faced with one of the situa-
tions addressed by that text, you contact or
seek the assistance of a MINI dealer's service
center or another service center or repair
shop that employs trained personnel that
can perform maintenance and repair work
on your vehicle in accordance with MINI
specifications.
While MINI, at no cost to you, will pay for re-
pairs required by the limited warranties pro-
vided with respect to your vehicle and for
maintenance under the Maintenance Pro-
gram during the applicable warranty and
maintenance coverage periods, you are free
to elect, both during those periods and the-
reafter, to have maintenance and repair
work provided by other service centers or
repair shops.
3. Where the Owner's Manual makes reference
to parts and accessories having been appro-
ved by MINI, those references are intended
to reflect that those parts and accessories
are recommended by MINI. You may elect
to use other parts and accessories, but, if
you do, we recommend that you make sure
that any such parts and/or accessories are
appropriate for use on your vehicle.
4. At page 6 and page 7, under the warranty
section's discussion of homologation, where
it states that you “cannot lodge warranty
claims for your vehicle there,” the text
should read that you “may not be able to
lodge warranty claims for your vehicle
there.”
5. At page 7, in the “Parts and accessories” sec-
tion, the sentence beginning “For your own
safety, … ,” should be disregarded and the
following the text should be read in lieu the-
reof: “The manufacturer of your vehicle re-
commends using genuine MINI parts and
accessories.” In the fifth sentence of that pa-
ragraph, the word “cannot” should read
“does not.”
6. At page 56, in the “Checking and replacing
safety belts” section, the text beginning,
“Have the work performed only by your ser-
vice center …” should be disregarded and
the following text should be read in lieu the-
reof: “MINI recommends having this work
performed by a service center as it is impor-
tant that this safety feature functions pro-
perly.”
7. At page 92, in the “MINI Convertible: Rollo-
ver Protection System” section, the sentence
beginning, “Work on the rollover protection
system …” should be disregarded and the
following text should be read in lieu thereof:
“MINI recommends having this work perfor-
med by a service center as it is important
that this safety feature functions properly.”
8. At page 126 under the heading: “Objects in
the area around the pedals” and at page
262 under the heading: “Carpets/floor
mats,” the paragraph that begins: “Only use
floor mats …” should be disregarded and
the following language should be read in
lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your ve-
hicle recommends that you use floor mats
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Addendum
that have been identified by it as appropri-
ate for use in your vehicle and that can be
properly fixed in place.”
9. At page 132, under the heading: “Have
maintenance carried out,” the sentence be-
ginning, “Have the maintenance carried
out …” should be disregarded and the fol-
lowing text should be read in lieu thereof:
“MINI recommends that you have the main-
tenance carried out by your service center.”
10. At page 211, under the heading “Software
applications,” the text of that section should
be disregarded and the following text read
in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your
vehicle recommends the use of MINI recom-
mended software; otherwise there may be
malfunctions in system operations.”
11. At page 220, under the heading “Pressure
specifications,” the sentence beginning,
“The inflation pressures apply to the tire si-
zes approved … .” should be disregarded.
12. At page 229, under the heading: “Approved
wheels and tires,” the term “Approved”
should be disregarded and in lieu thereof,
the term “Recommended” should be read in
its place. In addition, the text of that section
should be disregarded and the following
text should be read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly
suggests that you use wheels and tires that
have been recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer for your vehicle type; other-
wise, for example, despite having the same
official size ratings, variations can lead to
body contact and with it, the risk of severe
accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate non-recommended wheels and ti-
res to determine if they are suitable for use
on your vehicle.
13. At page 235, under the heading “Hood,” the
sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar”
should be disregarded.
14. At page 239, under the heading: “Service
and Warranty Information Booklet for US
Models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian Models,” the second
paragraph should be disregarded and the
following text read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that you have maintenance and re-
pair performed by your MINI dealer's service
center or another service center or repair
shop that employs trained personnel that
can perform maintenance and repair work
on your vehicle in accordance with MINI
specifications. The manufacturer of your ve-
hicle recommends that you maintain re-
cords of all maintenance and repair work
performed on your vehicle.
15. At page 251, under the “Battery replace-
ment” section, the text should be disregar-
ded and in lieu thereof the following text
should be read:
Use of recommended vehicle batteries
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that you use vehicle batteries that it
has tested and recommends for use in your
vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be da-
maged and systems or functions may not be
fully available.
After a battery replacement, the manufactu-
rer of your vehicle recommends that you
have the battery registered on your vehicle
by a service center to ensure that all comfort
functions are fully available, and that any
“check control” messages of these comfort
functions are no longer displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 276.
6 Notes
AT A GLANCE
12 Cockpit
18 Onboard monitor
24 Voice activation system
CONTROLS
30 Opening and closing
53 Adjusting
59 Transporting children safely
64 Driving
73 Displays
84 Lamps
89 Safety
100 Driving stability control systems
105 Driving comfort
108 Climate
114 Interior equipment
118 Storage compartments
DRIVING TIPS
124 Things to remember when driving
128 Loading
131 Saving fuel
NAVIGATION
136 Navigation system
138 Destination entry
147 Destination guidance
155 What to do if...
ENTERTAINMENT
158 Tone
160 Radio
168 CD/multimedia
COMMUNICATION
182 Bluetooth hands-free system
192 Bluetooth mobile phone preparation
package
203 Office
211 MINI Connected
MOBILITY
216 Refueling
218 Fuel
220 Wheels and tires
234 Engine compartment
236 Engine oil
238 Coolant
239 Maintenance
241 Replacing components
253 Breakdown assistance
258 Care
REFERENCE
266 Technical data
270 Short commands for voice activation
276 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Notes
Using this Owner's
Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on MINI, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: www.mini.com
Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle equipment
The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayeri‐
sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW
AG.
This Owner's Manual describes all models, all
series equipment, as well as country-specific
and special equipment offered in the model
series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de‐
scribes and depicts equipment that may not be
contained in your vehicle because of the se‐
lected special equipment or country version, for
example.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
For options and equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐
plementary Owner's Manuals.
Status of this Owner's
Manual at time of print‐
ing
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
For your own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery
— homologation. If your vehicle is to be oper‐
ated in a different country it might be neces‐
Seite 6
Notes
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ‐
ing operating conditions and permit
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you cannot lodge warranty claims
for your vehicle there. Further information can
be obtained from your Service Center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair
methods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
MINI service center or a workshop that works
according to MINI repair procedures with ap‐
propriately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, it is recommended that
you use genuine parts and accessories ap‐
proved by MINI. When you purchase accesso‐
ries tested and approved by MINI and Genuine
MINI Parts, you simultaneously acquire the as‐
surance that they have been thoroughly tested
by MINI to ensure optimum performance when
installed on your vehicle. MINI warrants these
parts to be free from defects in material and
workmanship. MINI will not accept any liability
for damage resulting from installation of parts
and accessories not approved by MINI. MINI
cannot test every product made by other man‐
ufacturers to verify if it can be used on a MINI
safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its
operation, or its occupants. Genuine MINI Parts,
MINI Accessories and other products approved
by MINI, together with professional advice on
using these items, are available from all MINI
centers. Installation and operation of non MINI
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment,
for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or
similar accessories, may cause extensive dam‐
age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter‐
fere with the vehicle's electrical system or af‐
fect the validity of the MINI Limited Warranty.
See your MINI center for additional informa‐
tion. Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems may
be performed by any automotive repair estab‐
lishment or individual using any certified auto‐
motive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐
fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
Seite 7
Notes
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is
operated under those conditions. If you wish to
operate your vehicle in another country or re‐
gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐
cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable war‐
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐
tomer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ MINI Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not
covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Data memory
Numerous electronic components in your vehi‐
cle contain data memories that store technical
information on the vehicle condition, events
and faults, either temporarily or permanently.
This technical information generally documents
the state of a component, a module, a system
or the environment:
▷ Operating conditions of system compo‐
nents, such as filling levels.
▷ Status messages from the vehicle and its in‐
dividual components, such as wheel rpm/
speed, motion delay, transverse accelera‐
tion.
▷ Malfunctions and defects in important sys‐
tem components, such as lights and brakes.
▷ Vehicle responses to special driving situa‐
tions, such as airbag deployment, use of
the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as the tempera‐
ture.
These data are of a technical nature only and
are used to detect and eliminate faults and to
optimize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of
routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre‐
ated from these data. If services are used, for
instance in the event of repairs, service proc‐
esses, warranty cases, quality assurance, etc.,
this technical information can be read out from
the event and fault data memories by service
personnel, including the manufacturer, using
special diagnosis tools. This service personnel
can provide you with more information if
needed. After troubleshooting, the information
in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten
continuously.
Situations are conceivable during the use of the
vehicle in which these technical data could be‐
come associated with a specific person in com‐
bination with other information, such as an ac‐
cident report, damage to the vehicle, witness
accounts, etc., possibly with the involvement of
an authorized expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
calization in the event of an emergency, permit
the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the
vehicle.
Seite 8
Notes
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety- related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor ve‐
hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐
ety.
Seite 9
Notes
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
WATCH ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
All around the steering wheel
1 Setting the exterior mirror, folding it in and
out 57
2 Parking lights 84
Low beams 84
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 84
Adaptive Light Control 86
Turn signal 67
High-beams 67
Headlight flasher 67
Roadside parking lights 85
Computer 74
Seite 12
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3 MINI Roadster, MINI Convertible: Always
Open Timer 76
4 Tachometer 74
Instrument lighting 87
Trip odometer 73
5 Windshield wipers 67
6 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 64
7 Ignition lock 64
8 Steering wheel buttons, right
Resuming cruise control 106
Storing the speed and accelerat‐
ing or slowing down 106
Activating/deactivating cruise
control 105
Steering wheel buttons, left
Volume
Bluetooth hands-free sys‐
tem 182
Bluetooth mobile phone prepara‐
tion package 192
Activate/deactivate the voice acti‐
vation system 24
Microphone on the steering col‐
umn
Change the radio station
Select a music track
Scroll through the redial list
9 Horn, the entire surface
10 Adjust the steering wheel 58
11 Releasing the hood 235
Seite 13
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Displays
1 Tachometer 74
with indicator and warning lights 15
2 Display for
▷ Current speed 73
▷ Indicator/warning lights 15
3 Resetting the trip odometer 73
4 Display for
▷ Steptronic transmission position 70
▷ On-board computer 74
▷ Service requirements 80
▷ Odometer and trip odometer 73
▷ Flat Tire Monitor 92
▷ Tire Pressure Monitor 94
▷ Settings and information 76
▷ Personal Profile settings 31
5 Instrument lighting 87
6 Speedometer with indicator and warning
lights 15
7 Control Display 18
8 Fuel gauge 74
Seite 14
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Indicator/warning lights
The concept
The indicator and warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors in display
area 1 or 2.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning when the engine is started or the
ignition is switched on, and light up briefly.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lights.
Supplementary text messages
You can call up more information, e.g., on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, refer to page 81.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding light comes on.
Indicator lights without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal, refer to page 67
High-beams/headlight flasher, refer
to page 67
Front fog lights, refer to page 86
Rear fog light, refer to page 87
DSC or DTC is regulating the propul‐
sive forces in order to maintain driv‐
ing stability, refer to page 100
The parking brake is set, refer to
page 66
Engine malfunction with adverse ef‐
fect on emissions, refer to page 240
Cruise control, refer to page 105
Seite 15
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
All around the center console
1 Hazard warning system
2 Speedometer with Control Display 14
3 Radio 160
CD/multimedia 160
4 Air conditioning, automatic climate con‐
trol 109
5 Buttons on the center console
Seat heating 55
Power windows 41
Rear fog light 87
MINI Convertible: central power
window switch 42
Front fog lights 86
Central locking, inside 35
Seite 16
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
All around the head‐
liner
1 Indicator/warning lights for the front pas‐
senger airbags 91
2 Switch panel
Reading lights 87
MINI Roadster: interior lights/
reading lights 87
Ambient lighting color 88
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: ex‐
tending and retracting the spoiler
manually 102
MINI Convertible: opening and
closing the sliding sunroof or
convertible top 42
MINI Roadster: opening and clos‐
ing the convertible top 50
Interior lights 87
All around the shift/
selector lever
1 USB audio interface 172
2 Buttons in the center console
Sport button 102
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 100
3 MINI joystick with buttons 18
Seite 17
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Onboard monitor
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
The concept
The onboard monitor combines the functions
of a large number of different switches. Thus,
these functions can be operated from a central
location.
Using the onboard monitor during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless
traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Control elements at a
glance
Control elements
1 Control Display
2 MINI joystick with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the me‐
nus directly. The MINI joystick can be used
to select menu items and create settings.
Control Display
Hints
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 262.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switch off
1.
Move the MINI joystick repeatedly to the
right until the "Options" menu appears.
Seite 18
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the MINI joystick to switch on.
MINI joystick with buttons
Select menu items and create settings.
1.
Turn, arrow 1.
2. Press, arrow 2.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on the MINI joystick
Press button Function
Open the main menu.
Changes to another menu.
Operating concept
Start screen
In the radio ready state and higher, the follow‐
ing message appears on the Control Display:
To hide the message: press the MINI joystick.
The main menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after ap‐
prox. 10 seconds.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
Seite 19
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
All onboard monitor functions can be called up
via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired
menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
A new menu is displayed or the function is per‐
formed.
With the button on the MINI joystick:
Press the button.
The menu items of the main menu can be
opened consecutively by pressing the button
repeatedly.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the MINI joystick to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previ‐
ous panel is displayed.
▷ Move the MINI joystick to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐
ous display.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens
with the panel that was last selected in that
menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
Move the MINI joystick to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
Opening the Options menu
Move the MINI joystick repeatedly to the right
until the "Options" menu appears.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control
display".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Store
station".
Seite 20
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set‐
ting is displayed.
3. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the set‐
ting.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the
clock
Setting the clock
1.
Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the MINI joystick until "Settings" is
highlighted and press the MINI joystick.
3. If necessary, move the MINI joystick to the
left to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time/Date" is
highlighted and press the MINI joystick.
5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and
press the MINI joystick.
6. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes
and press the MINI joystick.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
Seite 21
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Check Control messages and entries using the
voice activation system temporarily hide the
status information.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped into various catego‐
ries.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio™ is switched on.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Wireless network reception strength
Symbol flashes: searching for network.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Text message, e-mail was received.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD player.
AUX-IN port.
Symbol Meaning
USB audio interface.
Music interface for smartphones.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched off.
Entering letters and
numbers
General information
1.
Turn the MINI joystick: select letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the MINI joystick: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Press the MINI joystick for an ex‐
tended period: delete all letters or
numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering letters and numbers.
Seite 22
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower
case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering uppercase and lowercase let‐
ters.
Symbol Function
Move the MINI joystick forward:
switch from upper to lower case
letters.
Move the MINI joystick forward:
switch from lower to upper case
letters.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the
entry for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language
available on the Control Display.
Seite 23
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
The concept
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated with the
voice activation system using spoken com‐
mands. The system prompts you to make
your entries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐
ing the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the steering column.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐
tem.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 79.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
This symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is ac‐
tive.
3. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via the onboard monitor in this
case.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Seite 24
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
The functions of the main menu have short
commands.
Some list items, such as the phone book en‐
tries, can also be selected via the voice activa‐
tion system. Say the list items exactly as they
are displayed on the list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read possible com‐
mands aloud: ›Voice commands‹.
For example, if the "CD" menu is displayed, the
commands for the operating the CD player are
read out loud.
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, usually
irrespective of which menu item is currently se‐
lected, for instance ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 270.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about
the current operating options and the most
important commands for them are an‐
nounced.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
Example: playing back a
CD
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
out loud, in the same way as they are selected
via the MINI joystick.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D‹
5. ›C D drive‹
The CD is played back.
6.
Press the button on the steering
wheel again to select a specific track.
7. ›Track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Via short commands
Playback of the CD can also be started using a
short command.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D drive Track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the
announcements from the system are issued in
an abbreviated form.
Seite 25
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency Re‐
quests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a telephone connection.
Environmental condi‐
tions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors and windows closed to pre‐
vent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 26
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Seite 27
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
HANDLE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Opening tailgate
2 Unlocking
3 Locking
General information
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain
the batteries' charge status.
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 39.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re‐
mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Per‐
sonal Profile, refer to page 31.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 239.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door, refer to page 34.
▷ MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster: glove
compartment, refer to page 118.
▷ MINI Convertible: lock of rear seat backrest,
refer to page 116.
▷ MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: through-load‐
ing opening, refer to page 117.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Seite 30
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ Through Personal Profile, most of these set‐
tings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
▷ While the vehicle is being unlocked, the re‐
mote control is recognized and the settings
stored with it are called up and imple‐
mented.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone
else with another remote control.
▷ The individual settings are stored for no
more than three remote controls.
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷ Response of the central locking system
when the car is being unlocked, refer to
page 32.
▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 35.
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 67.
▷ Settings for the displays on the onboard
monitor, in the speedometer, and in the
tachometer:
▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to
page 78.
▷ Date format, refer to page 79.
▷ Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 79.
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 79.
▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 77.
▷ Light settings:
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 85.
▷ Daytime running lights, refer to
page 85.
▷ Automatic climate control, refer to
page 110: AUTO program, activating/deac‐
tivating the cooling function, setting the
temperature, air volume, and air distribu‐
tion.
▷ Entertainment:
▷ Tone settings, refer to page 158.
▷ Volume, refer to page 158.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Tailgate.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the door lock.
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door
handles on the driver's and front passenger
sides.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
anti-theft protection is switched on and off
as well. The anti-theft protection makes it
Seite 31
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
impossible to unlock the doors using the
lock buttons or door handles.
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and
ambient lighting are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re‐
fer to page 39.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system,
refer to page 35.
In an accident of the necessary severity, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Opening and closing:
from the outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button. The vehicle is un‐
locked.
The welcome lamps and interior lamps are
switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "All doors"
Press the button once: the en‐
tire vehicle unlocks.
▷ "Driver's door only"
Pressing the button once un‐
locks only the driver's door and the fuel
filler flap. Pressing twice unlocks the
entire vehicle.
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The power windows are opened. In the
MINI Convertible, the sliding sunroof is opened
as well.
Seite 32
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
To open the convertible top and the rear win‐
dows in the MINI Convertible: release the but‐
ton and then press and hold it again until the
convertible top is fully open. The side windows
remain open.
MINI Convertible with Comfort Access:
Hold the button down.
When you are close to the vehicle, the side win‐
dows move up after the convertible top is
opened.
Convenient closing
MINI Convertible:
The convertible top, sliding sunroof, and win‐
dows can be closed using the remote control
for Comfort Access when you are close to the
vehicle.
Hold the button down.
The convertible top and windows are closed.
Monitor the closing process
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand
from the door handle immediately stops the
closing process.◀
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
Convenient closing with the remote control is
not possible.
Locking
Press the button.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Setting the confirmation signals
Have unlocking or locking of the vehicle con‐
firmed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
4. Press the MINI joystick.
Switching on the interior lamps
When the vehicle is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your ve‐
hicle in parking garages, etc.
Unlocking the tailgate
Press the button for approx. 1 second
and then release it.
Malfunctions
The function of the remote control may be im‐
paired by local radio waves. If this occurs, un‐
lock and lock the vehicle at the door lock with
the integrated key.
If it should become impossible to lock the vehi‐
cle with a remote control, the battery in the re‐
mote control is discharged. Use this remote
control on an extended trip to recharge the
battery, refer to page 30.
Seite 33
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
Sets how the vehicle is to be unlocked, refer to
page 32.
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
driver's door can be unlocked and locked via
the door lock.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Unlocking the doors and tailgate at
once
To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail‐
gate at once:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐
ing the button for the central locking sys‐
tem in the interior, refer to page 35.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door, refer to page 35.
3. To lock the vehicle:
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door
from the outside.
Convenient opening and closing
In vehicles with an alarm system or Comfort Ac‐
cess, the windows can be operated via the door
lock.
MINI Convertible: sliding sunroof and
convertible top operation in addition.
Opening/closing
Turn the key to the unlock or lock position and
hold it there.
In the MINI Convertible, the convertible top is
closed, followed by the sliding sunroof and side
windows.
Keep the closing area clear
Watch during the opening and closing
process to be sure that no one becomes trap‐
ped. Releasing the key stops the motion.◀
Seite 34
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, the driver's
door can be unlocked or locked by turning the
integrated key to the end positions of the door
lock.
Opening and closing:
from the inside
The switch can be used to lock or unlock the
doors and tailgate when the doors are closed,
but they are not theft-protected. The fuel filler
flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening doors
▷ Using the switch for the central locking sys‐
tem, unlock all of the doors at once and
then pull the door opener above the arm‐
rest, or
▷ Pull the door handle on each door twice:
the door is unlocked the first time and
opened the second time.
Locking
▷ Press the switch or
▷ Push down the lock button of a door. To
avoid locking yourself out by accident, the
driver's door cannot be locked at the lock
button while the door is open.
Automatic locking
In addition, it is possible to set the situations in
which the vehicle locks. The setting is stored for
the remote control in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select a menu item:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system locks after a
short period if no door is opened.
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks when
you start driving.
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
Tailgate
Opening
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Seite 35
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
In some market-specific versions, the tailgate
can only be unlocked using the remote control
if the vehicle was unlocked first.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control or the button in the handle, ar‐
row. The tailgate is unlocked and can be
opened.
MINI Convertible
The open tailgate can be loaded with a maxi‐
mum weight of 175 lbs/80 kg.
Manual release
In the event of an electrical malfunction, the
tailgate can be unlocked manually.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
Pull the handle. The tailgate is unlocked.
MINI Convertible:
1. Using the integrated key, unlock the lock of
the rear seat backrests 1
2. Press button 2 and fold the rear seat back‐
rest forward while guiding the safety belt.
3. Pull the handle, see arrow. The tailgate is
unlocked.
Seite 36
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster:
emergency unlocking
Pull the handle in the cargo area. The tailgate is
unlocked.
Closing
Keep the closing area clear
Make sure that the closing area of the
tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage
may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle and do not place it in
the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control
may be locked into the vehicle when the tail‐
gate is closed.◀
MINI Coupe
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
MINI Roadster
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control. All you need to do is to
have the remote control with you, e.g., in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically de‐
tects the remote control when it is nearby or in
the passenger compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
▷ Starting the engine.
▷ MINI Convertible: Convenient closing and
convertible top operation with the remote
control for Comfort Access.
▷ MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: closing the side
windows.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence in the vicinity.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Seite 37
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is inside the vehicle.
▷ The doors and tailgate must be closed to
operate the windows.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons or via Comfort Access.
Notes on opening and closing, refer to page 30.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing the windows or convertible top, the sys‐
tem is checking whether a remote control is in‐
side the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closing
procedure, if necessary.
Unlocking
Press button 1.
Depending on the setting, either only the driv‐
er's door or the entire vehicle is unlocked, refer
to page 32.
Pressing the button again locks the entire vehi‐
cle again.
Convenient opening with the remote control,
refer to page 32.
Locking
Press button 1.
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster:
windows and convertible top operation
In the radio ready state and beyond, the win‐
dows and the electrical convertible top can be
opened and closed when a remote control is lo‐
cated inside the vehicle.
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.
This corresponds to pressing the following but‐
ton on the remote control:
.
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo
area is detected in the locked vehicle after the
tailgate is closed, the tailgate opens again
slightly. The hazard warning system flashes and
an acoustic signal sounds.
Power windows
When the engine is switched off, the windows
can be operated as long as neither the doors
nor the tailgate are opened.
When the door and tailgate are closed again
and the remote control is detected inside the
vehicle, the windows can be operated again.
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock
to be able to operate the windows while the
engine is switched off and the doors are open.
Switching on the radio ready state
Press the Start/Stop button to switch on the
radio ready state, refer to page 64.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch; other‐
wise, the engine will start.
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can
be switched on, refer to page 64, when a re‐
mote control is inside the vehicle. It is not nec‐
essary to insert a remote control into the igni‐
tion lock.
Switching off the engine in cars with
Steptronic transmission
The engine can only be switched off with the
selector lever in position P, refer to page 70.
Seite 38
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
To switch off the engine with the selector lever
in position N, the remote control must be in‐
serted in the ignition lock.
Before driving a vehicle with Steptronic
transmission into a car wash
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
switch.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch the engine off.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunction
The Comfort Access functions can be disturbed
by local radio waves, such as by a mobile
phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote
control or when a mobile phone is being
charged in the vehicle.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using
the buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
To start the engine afterward, insert the remote
control into the ignition switch.
Warning lights
The warning light in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot be
started.
The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a
malfunction. Take the remote control with you
inside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces‐
sary, insert another remote control into the ig‐
nition switch.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is run‐
ning: the remote control is no longer in‐
side the vehicle.
After switching off the engine, the engine can
only be started again within approx. 10 sec‐
onds if no door has been opened.
The indicator lamp lights up and a mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display: re‐
place the remote control battery.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access contains
a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Insert a new battery with the positive side
facing upwards.
3. Press the cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling center
or to your service center.
Alarm system
The concept
The enabled alarm system reacts to the follow‐
ing:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements inside the vehicle.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
Depending on the market-specific version, the
alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry
attempts by:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
Seite 39
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Arming and disarming the alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked and unlocked, the
alarm system is armed and disarmed at the
same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the
alarm on some market-specific versions.
To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or switch on the ignition.
Tailgate with armed alarm system
The tailgate, refer to page 33, can also be
opened when the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol.
When you subsequently close the tailgate, it is
again locked and monitored.
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the
alarm on some market-specific versions.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol, refer to page 32.
▷ Insert the remote control all the way into
the ignition lock.
▷ With Comfort Access and if you are carrying
the remote control with you, push the but‐
ton on the door lock.
Display on the tachometer
When the alarm system is being armed, all LEDs
pulse like a heartbeat. One LED flashes after
approx. 16 minutes.
▷ LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed.
▷ One LED flashes at short intervals: the
doors, hood, or tailgate is not properly
closed.
Even if these are not closed fully, the re‐
maining items are locked and the LEDs
pulse after approx. 10 seconds for approx.
16 minutes; afterwards, one LED flashes.
The interior motion sensor is not activated.
▷ The LEDs go out after the vehicle is un‐
locked: the vehicle has not been tampered
with in the meantime.
▷ The LEDs flash after the vehicle is unlocked
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes: the vehicle has been tampered
with in the meantime.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control
for at least two seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button on the
remote control.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Seite 40
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Interior motion sensor
MINI Coupe
For the interior motion sensor to function prop‐
erly, the windows must be closed.
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster
The interior of the car is monitored up to the
height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm sys‐
tem is armed together with the interior motion
sensor even if the convertible top is open. An
alarm can be triggered unintentionally by fall‐
ing objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding un‐
intentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
▷
Press the button on the remote
control twice in succession.
▷ Lock the vehicle twice with the integrated
key.
The LEDs flash in short succession for approx.
2 seconds. The tilt alarm sensor and interior
motion sensor remain switched off until the ve‐
hicle is unlocked and locked again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐
jure themselves.◀
If, after having been opened and closed a num‐
ber of times in close succession, a window can
only be closed, the system is overheated. Let
the system cool down for several minutes with
the ignition switched on or the engine running.
Opening
▷ Press the switch downward.
The window opens until the switch is re‐
leased.
▷ Press the switch downward briefly.
In the radio ready state and higher, the
window opens automatically. Press again
briefly to stop the opening procedure.
To open the window by a crack, briefly press
the switch downward twice in close succession.
Closing
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
To close, press the switch upward. The window
closes until the switch is released.
Seite 41
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Initializing the power windows
If the battery was disconnected, for example to
change the battery or to put the vehicle into
storage, reinitialize the power windows; other‐
wise, the windows will not be lowered.
1. Close the doors.
2. Open both windows.
3. Close both windows.
Please contact your service center in the event
of a malfunction.
MINI Convertible: central power
windows switch
▷ Press the switch downward.
The rear and front windows open consecu‐
tively until the switch is released.
▷ Press the switch downward briefly.
With the ignition switched on: the rear and
front windows open automatically. Press
again briefly to stop the opening proce‐
dure.
To close the windows, press the switch upward
and hold it.
Do not close the windows until the closing pro‐
cedure of the convertible top is completed;
otherwise, it cannot be ensured that the side
windows will form a tight seal with the rubber
seals of the convertible top. Convertible top, re‐
fer to page 43.
After the ignition is switched off
The windows can be operated for approx. 1 mi‐
nute after the remote control is removed or the
ignition is switched off.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐
jure themselves.◀
MINI Convertible:
convertible top with
integrated sliding sun‐
roof
If possible, conserve the battery by only operat‐
ing the convertible top while the engine is run‐
ning.
Before closing the convertible top, remove all
foreign objects from the windshield frame as
these could prevent the top from closing prop‐
erly.
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
To open:
Press the switch back until the desired position
or the end position is reached.
To close:
Press the switch forward.
The sliding sunroof can be opened or closed at
vehicle speeds up to 74 mph/120 km/h.
Seite 42
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Electrical convertible top
The fully-automatic convertible top combines
reliable weather protection with simple and
convenient operation.
To ensure that you will continue to enjoy your
MINI Convertible, here are a few tips:
▷ It is advisable that you close the convertible
top when you park the vehicle. Not only
does the closed convertible top protect the
vehicle interior against unanticipated
weather damage, it also offers a certain
amount of theft protection. However, even
when the convertible top is closed, valua‐
bles should only be stored in the locked
cargo area.
▷ Do not attach roof rack systems to the
convertible top.
▷ If you open the convertible top while it is
wet, e.g., after driving in the rain, water
may drip into the cargo area. If necessary,
remove items from the cargo area before‐
hand to avoid water stains or soiling.
Safety notes on the convertible top
▷ At temperatures below +10 ℉/-12 ℃,
do not move the convertible top or
else damage could result.
▷ Do not leave the convertible top open for
longer than one day while it is wet; other‐
wise, damage could be caused by the mois‐
ture.
▷ Do not place any objects on the convertible
top; otherwise, they could fall during oper‐
ation of the convertible top and cause
damage or injury.
▷ The convertible top pivots up when it is
opened and closed. When moving the
convertible top in places like garages, en‐
sure that there is a minimum height of
79 inches/2 meters; otherwise, damage
could result.
▷ When the rollover protection system is ex‐
tended, do not move the convertible top
under any circumstances.
▷ Always carry out the convertible top move‐
ment to the end. Driving when the
convertible top is not fully opened or closed
may result in damage or injury.
▷ During opening and closing, ensure that
people cannot be injured by the convertible
top frame or other moving parts. Keep chil‐
dren away from the opening path of the
convertible top.
▷ For safety reasons, only move the
convertible top while the vehicle is station‐
ary, if possible.
▷ Do not place any objects on the convertible
top; otherwise, they could fall during oper‐
ation of the convertible top and cause
damage or injury.◀
Before opening and closing
▷ Follow the above-mentioned safety instruc‐
tions.
▷ Ensure that the cargo cover is in the lower
position, refer to page 117; otherwise, the
convertible top cannot be opened.
▷ Ensure that cargo does not push against
the cargo cover from underneath.
▷ Ensure that the tailgate is closed.
Opening and closing the convertible
top
To open:
Press the switch back to open the sliding sun‐
roof. Press it again to open the convertible top.
To close:
Seite 43
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Press the switch forward.
Operation while driving
The convertible top can be opened or closed
while driving at vehicle speeds up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
Pay close attention to the traffic
When operating the convertible top while
driving, pay extra attention to the traffic to
avoid an accident. If possible, do not move the
convertible top while driving in reverse because
your view to the rear is severely limited during
the procedure. Do not operate the convertible
top while the vehicle is moving through curves,
on uneven road surfaces, or in wind.◀
For better control
▷ The LED lights up while the convertible top
is activated until the top is fully opened or
closed.
▷ The LED flashes after the switch is released.
The opening or closing procedure is not yet
fully completed. The sequence can be con‐
tinued in the desired direction by pushing
or pulling the switch.
▷ The "convertible top not locked" indicator
lamp lights up and a message appears on
the Control Display.
Interruption
Danger
A convertible top that is not fully opened
or closed is a source of danger.◀
The automatic sequence of movements is inter‐
rupted immediately if the switch for convertible
top operation is released. The sequence can be
continued in the desired direction by pushing
or pulling the switch.
When the opening or closing procedure is inter‐
rupted because the switch is released, the
convertible top remains in the position in which
it stopped for a few seconds before it slowly
moves to a stable position. The sequence can
be continued using the switch.
The opening or closing procedure is also inter‐
rupted when it is blocked mechanically. To be
able to reactivate the convertible top in this
case:
1. Switch the ignition off and on again.
2. Press the switch to continue the sequence
in the desired direction.
Opening and closing procedure
Do not interrupt the closing procedure
Do not interrupt and resume the closing
procedure several times in close succession as
this could damage the convertible top mecha‐
nism.◀
If, after having been activated a number of
times in close succession, the convertible top
can only be moved in one direction, the
convertible top system is overheated. Let the
system cool for approx. 4 minutes.
If the battery was disconnected, for example to
change the battery or to put the vehicle into
storage, reinitialize, refer to page 42, the power
windows; otherwise, the windows will not be
lowered, and it will not be possible to open the
convertible top.
Convenient opening and closing
Convenient operation is possible via the remote
control, refer to page 32, and the door lock, re‐
fer to page 34.
Manual closing in case of electrical
malfunction
Only close the convertible top manually if
there is an electrical malfunction
Only close the convertible top manually if this is
absolutely necessary; never open it manually.
Damage may occur if incorrectly operated. The
closing procedure must be fully completed;
otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage.◀
Seite 44
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Before closing
1. Take the hex key and screwdriver out of the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 241.
2. Pry out the trunk lamp in the left side trim
using the screwdriver, arrow.
3. Using the screwdriver, unscrew the gold-
colored screw by approx. one and a half
turns.
Unlocking the convertible top
1.
Release the screw, arrow, using the hex key
and take it out.
2. Slide the cover in the direction of travel, ar‐
row 1, and twist it out sideways, arrow 2. If
necessary, push the plastic trim, arrow 3,
inward slightly.
3. Pull the sensor out of the cover, arrow, and
set it down on the inside side trim.
4. Release the second screw, arrow, using the
hex key to unlock the convertible top.
5. Take out the screw.
6. Lift the side frame slightly, arrow 1, and pull
the sensor and cable forward out of the
guide.
7. Pivot the cable out sideways, arrow 2.
When setting it down, ensure that the cable
is not pinched.
8. Unlock the second side frame.
Seite 45
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Closing the convertible top
1. Hold on to the convertible top on the re‐
spective side frames with both hands.
2. Lift it out on both sides and pivot it forward
onto the cowl.
3. In the vehicle, pry out the cover in the mid‐
dle of the roof using the screwdriver.
Closing the sliding sunroof
1.
Insert the hex key into the opening de‐
signed for this purpose in the middle of the
roof and press upward, arrow 1.
2. Turn the hex key in the direction of arrow 2.
3. Open the two locks and take off the locking
pieces.
Ensure that the locking pieces do not fall
onto the vehicle, as this could cause dam‐
age.
4. Insert the pins into the respective mount on
the cowl, arrow.
Locking the convertible top
Turn the hex key opposite to the direction of
arrow 2 until the convertible top is locked.
Please contact your service center to eliminate
the malfunction.
MINI Convertible: wind
deflector
The wind deflector keeps air movements in the
passenger compartment to a minimum when
the convertible top is open and provides an
even more comfortable ride, even at high
speeds.
Do not allow pointed object to come into con‐
tact with the wind deflector as these may dam‐
age the net. Do not place any objects on the in‐
stalled wind deflector. When stowing, make
sure that the wind deflector is not damaged by
objects.
Before installing
1.
Take the wind deflector out of the pouch.
Seite 46
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
2. Unfold the wind deflector, see arrows.
3. Push together the catches until they en‐
gage, see arrows.
Mounting and unfolding
1.
Push out retaining pin 2 on one side until it
engages.
2. Insert the retaining pins of the wind deflec‐
tor into the provided openings 1 and 2 on
this side of the vehicle.
3. Push back retaining pin 1 against the spring
force on the other side of the vehicle and
insert it in the provided opening.
4. Push out retaining pin 2 until it engages.
5. Fold up the upper part of the wind deflec‐
tor.
Do not damage the wind deflector
In the rearmost seat position, do not in‐
cline the backrest too far back; otherwise, the
wind deflector could be damaged.◀
Removing and folding up
The unit is removed in the reverse order from
which it was mounted.
Push the unlocking lever to the middle of the
wind deflector and fold up both halves.
MINI Roadster: manual
convertible top
General information
The fabric convertible top combines reliable
weather protection with simple and convenient
operation.
Seite 47
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
To ensure that you will continue to enjoy your
MINI Convertible, here are a few tips:
▷ It is advisable that you close the convertible
top when you park the vehicle. Not only
does the closed convertible top protect the
vehicle interior against unanticipated
weather damage, it also offers a certain
amount of theft protection. However, even
when the convertible top is closed, valua‐
bles should only be stored in the locked
cargo area.
▷ Do not attach roof rack systems to the
convertible top.
Safety notes on the convertible top
▷ Do not leave the convertible top open
for longer than one day while it is
wet; otherwise, damage could be
caused by the moisture.
▷ Do not place any objects on the convertible
top; otherwise, they could fall during oper‐
ation of the convertible top and cause
damage or injury.
▷ The convertible top pivots up when it is
opened and closed. When moving the
convertible top in places like garages, en‐
sure that there is a minimum height of
79 inches/2 meters; otherwise, damage
could result.
▷ Always carry out the convertible top move‐
ment to the end. Driving when the
convertible top is not fully opened or closed
may result in damage or injury.
▷ During opening and closing, ensure that
people cannot be injured by the convertible
top frame or other moving parts. Keep chil‐
dren away from the opening path of the
convertible top.
▷ For safety reasons, only move the
convertible top while the vehicle is station‐
ary, if possible.
▷ Do not place any objects on the convertible
top; otherwise, they could fall during oper‐
ation of the convertible top and cause
damage or injury.◀
Opening
1. Fold out the handle and turn it all the way
to the end, arrow.
2. Push the unlocked convertible top upward
at the handle and open it about a hand's
width.
3. Exit the vehicle.
4. Guide the convertible top to the rear.
5. Push down on the convertible top with
some momentum until it engages audibly.
Seite 48
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Closing
1. Switch the ignition on so that the windows
can be slightly lowered automatically. Re‐
move the wind deflector if necessary.
2. Press button 1.
The convertible top is unlocked and moves
up slightly.
3. Exit the vehicle.
4. Guide the convertible top forward.
5. Pull the convertible top onto the windshield
frame.
6. Turn the handle clockwise until it engages
audibly.
The convertible top is locked.
If the convertible top was open for a
lengthy period, it may be necessary to ap‐
ply greater force when locking the top.
7. Fold the handle back in.
MINI Roadster: semi-auto‐
matic convertible top
General information
The fabric convertible top combines reliable
weather protection with simple and convenient
operation.
To ensure that you will continue to enjoy your
MINI Convertible, here are a few tips:
▷ It is advisable that you close the convertible
top when you park the vehicle. Not only
does the closed convertible top protect the
vehicle interior against unanticipated
weather damage, it also offers a certain
amount of theft protection. However, even
when the convertible top is closed, valua‐
bles should only be stored in the locked
cargo area.
▷ Do not attach roof rack systems to the
convertible top.
Safety notes on the convertible top
▷ At temperatures below +14 ℉/-10 ℃,
do not move the convertible top or
else damage could result.
▷ Do not leave the convertible top open for
longer than one day while it is wet; other‐
wise, damage could be caused by the mois‐
ture.
▷ Do not place any objects on the convertible
top; otherwise, they could fall during oper‐
ation of the convertible top and cause
damage or injury.
▷ The convertible top pivots up when it is
opened and closed. When moving the
convertible top in places like garages, en‐
sure that there is a minimum height of
79 inches/2 meters; otherwise, damage
could result.
▷ Always carry out the convertible top move‐
ment to the end. Driving when the
convertible top is not fully opened or closed
may result in damage or injury.
▷ During opening and closing, ensure that
people cannot be injured by the convertible
top frame or other moving parts. Keep chil‐
dren away from the opening path of the
convertible top.
▷ For safety reasons, only move the
convertible top while the vehicle is station‐
ary, if possible.◀
Operation while driving
The convertible top can be opened or closed
while driving at vehicle speeds up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
Seite 49
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Pay close attention to the traffic
When operating the convertible top while
driving, pay extra attention to the traffic to
avoid an accident. If possible, do not move the
convertible top while driving in reverse because
your view to the rear is severely limited during
the procedure. Do not operate the convertible
top while the vehicle is moving through curves,
on uneven road surfaces, or in wind.◀
For better control
The indicator lamp lights up. Movement
of the convertible top is completed. The
convertible top is fully opened.
The indicator lamp lights up. Movement
of the convertible top is completed.
Close the convertible top using the han‐
dle.
Malfunction
The "convertible top not locked" indicator lamp
lights up and a message appears on the Control
Display.
Interruption
Danger
A convertible top that is not fully opened
or closed is a source of danger.◀
The automatic sequence of movements is inter‐
rupted immediately if the switch for convertible
top operation is released. The sequence can be
continued in the desired direction by pushing
or pulling the switch.
When the opening or closing procedure is inter‐
rupted because the switch is released, the
convertible top remains in the position in which
it stopped. The sequence can be continued us‐
ing the switch.
The opening or closing procedure is also inter‐
rupted when it is blocked mechanically. To be
able to reactivate the convertible top in this
case:
1. Switch the ignition off and on again.
2. Press the switch to continue the sequence
in the desired direction.
Opening and closing the convertible
top
Switch on the radio ready state or the ignition,
refer to page 64.
If possible, conserve the battery by only operat‐
ing the convertible top while the engine is run‐
ning.
Before closing the convertible top, remove all
foreign objects from the windshield frame that
could prevent the top from closing properly.
Opening
1.
Fold out the handle and turn it all the way
to the end, arrow.
2. Push the unlocked convertible top upward
at the handle and open it about a hand's
width.
Seite 50
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Press the switch back to open the
convertible top. The windows opens during
this procedure.
Closing
1. Press the switch forward.
2. Pull the convertible top onto the windshield
frame.
3. Turn the handle clockwise until it engages
audibly.
The convertible top is locked.
If the convertible top was open for a
lengthy period, it may be necessary to ap‐
ply greater force when locking the top.
4. Fold the handle back in.
5. Close the windows if necessary.
Manual closing in case of electrical
malfunction
Only close the convertible top manually if
there is an electrical malfunction
Only close the convertible top manually if this is
absolutely necessary; never open it manually.
Damage may occur if incorrectly operated. The
closing procedure must be fully completed;
otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage.◀
Before closing
Lower the side windows slightly, switch off the
engine, and switch off the ignition.
1.
Take out the cover plate, refer to
page 116.
2. Take out the cargo area insert, arrow.
3. Using the hex key from the onboard vehicle
tool kit, unscrew the gold-colored screw,
see arrow, all the way to the stop, approx.
four to five turns.
Closing
1.
Hold on to the convertible top frame and
guide it to the windshield frame.
2. Fold out the handle and turn it counter‐
clockwise all the way to the stop.
3. Pull the convertible top onto the windshield
frame.
4. Turn the handle clockwise until it engages
audibly.
The convertible top is locked.
MINI Roadster: wind de‐
flector
The wind deflector keeps air movements in the
passenger compartment to a minimum when
the convertible top is open and provides a
comfortable ride, even at high speeds.
Seite 51
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Do not allow pointed object to come into con‐
tact with the wind deflector as these may dam‐
age the net.
Before installing
1. Take the wind deflector out of the storage
pouch.
2. Unfold the wind deflector, arrow.
Installation
1.
Insert the wind deflector with parts 1 facing
back into the holders 2 on the rollover bars.
2. Push the wind deflector down until it en‐
gages, arrow 3.
Attach the wind deflector properly
The wind deflector must be firmly en‐
gaged; otherwise, it may come lose from the
fixations at high speeds.◀
Removing
The unit is removed in the reverse order from
which it was mounted. Pull the wind deflector
upward out of the holders.
Storage
Fold up the wind deflector 1 and slide it into
the storage pouch 2.
The wind deflector can be stored on the rear
storage shelf behind the seats, refer to
page 120.
Seite 52
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 55.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 56.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 89.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving. The seat could respond with un‐
expected movement and the ensuing loss of
vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐
ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate
the protection normally provided by the belt.◀
Seat adjustment
Forward/backward
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat into
the desired position, arrows 2.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Height
Pull the lever up or push it down repeatedly, ar‐
rows 1, until the desired height is reached, ar‐
rows 2.
Seite 53
Adjusting
CONTROLS
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight
to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary, ar‐
rows 2.
Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar re‐
gion.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐
plementary support to help you maintain a re‐
laxed, upright sitting position.
Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the cur‐
vature.
Entry in the rear
MINI Convertible: entry in the rear.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: access to the rear
storage shelf.
1.
Pull the lever on the back of the seat up‐
ward, arrow 1.
The backrest folds forward.
2. Push against the backrest to move the seat
forward, arrow 2.
Restoring the original seat position
The driver's seat has a mechanical memory
function for the forward/backward seat setting
and the backrest setting.
1.
Push the seat back to the original position.
Do not fold back the backrest until the seat
is in its original position; otherwise, the seat
will engage in its current position. If this
happens, adjust the forward/backward po‐
sition manually, refer to page 53.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Note the following when moving back the
seat
When moving back the seat, ensure that per‐
sons cannot be injured and objects cannot be
damaged. Lock the front seats and front back‐
rests before driving away; otherwise, there is
the risk of an accident if the seat or backrest
moves unexpectedly.◀
Seite 54
CONTROLS
Adjusting
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Seat heating
Switching on
The temperature setting progresses one step
through its control sequence each time you
press the button. The maximum temperature is
reached when three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature set last.
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down
to no heat in order to reduce the load on the
battery. The LEDs remain lit.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts
Your vehicle has been fitted with safety belts
for the safety of you and your passengers:
▷ MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: two safety
belts.
▷ MINI Convertible: four safety belts.
However, they can only offer protection when
adjusted correctly.
Notes
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted.
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal
impact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
ble objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Seite 55
Adjusting
CONTROLS
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 53.
Unbuckling the belt
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
MINI Convertible: rear belt guide
When fastening the safety belts on the rear
seats, ensure that the belt guide loop, arrow, is
closed.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamps light up and a sig‐
nal sounds. In addition, a message ap‐
pears on the Control Display. Check
whether the safety belt has been fas‐
tened correctly.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Head restraints
Correctly set head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approx. at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Height adjustment
To raise: pull.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
the head restraint down until it engages.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Pull the head restraint upward as far as
possible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
To remove the head restraint, fold the backrest
forward if necessary.
Seite 56
CONTROLS
Adjusting
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
accident.◀
At a glance
1 Setting the left or right exterior mirror
2 Folding the mirror in and out
Adjusting electrically
1. Select the mirror by turning the knob to the
respective position 1.
2. To adjust the mirror, move the knob in the
desired direction: to the front, rear, left, or
right.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Folding the mirror in and out
Turn the knob past the resistance point in di‐
rection 2.
The mirror can be folded in up to a vehicle
speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are heated automatically
while the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on when the external temperature is
below a certain value.
Seite 57
Adjusting
CONTROLS
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Interior rearview mirror
To reduce the blinding effect from the rear
when driving at night: turn the knob.
Interior rearview and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature
Two photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror frame, see arrow.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
▷ Do not apply stickers to the windshield in
front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back
up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐
aged.◀
Seite 58
CONTROLS
Adjusting
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
The right place for chil‐
dren
Notes
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
MINI Convertible: children should
always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear
only, using child restraint fixing systems suita‐
ble for the age, weight, and height of the child;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in
an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to
their age, weight and size.◀
Installing child seats
Only install child seats in the rear when
the rear seat backrest is folded all the way back
and engaged; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Front passenger airbags
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint
fixing system on the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front and side airbags on
the front passenger side are deactivated, refer
to page 90.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Installing child re‐
straint fixing systems
Notes
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating the airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system on
the front passenger seat, ensure that the front
Seite 59
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
and side airbags on the front passenger side
are deactivated.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐
sition to obtain the best possible position for
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the
event of an accident.
Do not change this seat position once it has
been set.
Child seat security
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster
The safety belt for the passenger can be locked
to prevent it from being pulled out when it is
used to secure child restraint systems.
MINI Convertible
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked to prevent ex‐
tension in order to permit attachment of child
restraint fixing systems.
To lock the safety belt
1.
Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1.
Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
Seite 60
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
Guide the safety belt to the holder on the
headliner.
MINI Convertible: LATCH
child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.
Notes
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing systems, observe the operating and safety
information from the system manufacturer;
otherwise, the level of protection may be re‐
duced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
fixing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection of‐
fered may be reduced.◀
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located behind the indicated cover caps.
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats that are equipped with lower an‐
chors are labeled with two, 2, LATCH
symbols. It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of standard
ISOFIX outer positions to secure a child restraint
system in the middle. Use the safety belt for
middle positions instead.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1.
Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
fer to the operating instructions of the sys‐
tem.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing
systems with an upper re‐
taining strap
Mounting points
LATCH mounting points
Only use the mounting points for the up‐
per LATCH retaining strap to secure child re‐
straint systems; otherwise, the mounting points
could be damaged.◀
MINI Coupe:
Seite 61
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
There is one additional mounting point for child
restraint fixing systems with an upper retaining
strap, arrow.
MINI Convertible:
There are two additional mounting points for
child restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐
taining strap, arrows.
Guide of the upper LATCH retaining
strap
Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the
strap will not properly secure the child restraint
fixing system in the event of an accident.◀
MINI Coupe:
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Separating wall
4 Cargo area floor
5 Hook for upper retaining strap
6 Mounting point
7 Backrest
8 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐
ing system
MINI Convertible:
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Rollover protection system with crossbar
4 Cargo cover
5 Cargo area floor
6 Hook for upper retaining strap
7 Mounting point
8 Backrest
9 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐
ing system
Seite 62
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
MINI Coupe
1. Remove the front cargo cover, refer to
page 116.
2. Slide the head restraint upward.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
4. Attach the upper retaining strap to the
mounting point with the hook.
5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐
sition.
6. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.
MINI Convertible
Ensure that the upper retaining strap 9 is
passed between backrest 8 and rollover protec‐
tion system with crossbar 3; otherwise, it will be
unable to properly restrain the child restraint
fixing system.
1.
Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Unlock the backrest and fold it forward
slightly, refer to page 117.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
4. Attach the upper retaining strap to the
mounting point with the hook.
5. Fold back the backrest and lock it. Slide the
head restraint down as far as possible.
6. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.
Seite 63
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Driving
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Radio ready state is switched on. Individual
electrical consumers can operate.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control
out of the ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of
the ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Steptronic transmission
You can only take out the remote control if
transmission position P is engaged: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
nition on or off and starts the engine.
The engine starts when the Start/Stop button is
pressed and:
▷ Manual transmission: the clutch pedal is de‐
pressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission: the brake pedal is
depressed.
Radio ready state
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
▷ When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock.
▷ With Comfort Access, refer to page 37, by
pressing the button on the door handle or
the
button on the remote control.
▷ After a certain period of time.
Seite 64
CONTROLS
Driving
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. Most indi‐
cator and warning lights light up for different
lengths of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Radio ready state and ignition off
All indicator and warning lights in the displays
go out.
The ignition switches off automatically when
the driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/
Stop button again switches the ignition back
on.
For example, the ignition is not switched off in
the following situations:
▷ Depress the clutch or brake pedal.
▷ The low beams are switched on.
Starting the engine
General information
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐
tial source of danger.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
shift to neutral or engage transmission posi‐
tion P and set the parking brake firmly; other‐
wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Frequent starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is
the danger of overheating and damaging the
catalytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary; start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Do not depress the accelerator when starting
the engine.
Starting the engine
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or with
Comfort Access inside the vehicle, refer to
page 37.
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Steptronic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 37.
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Move the selector lever to position P or N.
Seite 65
Driving
CONTROLS
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Engine stop
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the windows and injure
themselves.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, for example, by turning the steering
wheel in the direction of the curb.◀
Before driving into a car wash
To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an
automatic car wash, follow the information on
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to
page 258.
Switching off the engine
Manual transmission
1.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake firmly.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐
tion lock.
Steptronic transmission
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake firmly.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐
tion lock.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Also follow the instructions under Switching off
the engine, refer to page 66.
Setting
The lever engages automatically.
Releasing
Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the
lever.
Notes
Using the parking brake while driving
If it should become necessary to use the
parking brake while driving, do not pull the
parking brake too forcefully. Keep the button
on the parking brake lever pressed at all times.
Seite 66
CONTROLS
Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Excessive application of the parking brake can
block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of
the vehicle.◀
The brake lights do not light up when the park‐
ing brake is pulled.
Turn signal, high-beams,
headlight flasher
1 Turn signal
2 Switching on the high-beams
3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight
flasher
Turn signal
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
This function can be activated or deactivated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Washer/wiper system
Notes
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are
frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the
wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor
may be damaged.◀
Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield
Do not use the wipers on a dry wind‐
shield; otherwise, the wiper blades may wear
more rapidly or become damaged.◀
At a glance
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
Seite 67
Driving
CONTROLS
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
the rain sensor
4 Cleaning the windshield and headlights
Switching on wipers
Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press up once.
The system switches to operation in the inter‐
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press up twice or press once beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Switching off wipers or brief wipe
Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the
time between wipes is controlled automatically
and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,
directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise,
damage could be caused by undesired wiper
activation.◀
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3.
The symbol is shown in the tachometer.
Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor
1.
Switch on the ignition, refer to page 65.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol and "SET" are displayed.
Seite 68
CONTROLS
Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Press the button to select the desired sensi‐
tivity.
7. Wait or hold the button until the display
changes.
The settings were stored.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
Cleaning the windshield and headlights
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlights are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Do not use the washing facilities when
the hood is open
Only use the washing facilities when the hood
is fully locked; otherwise, the headlamp washer
system may become damaged.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐
tomatically while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause in‐
juries if used improperly.
Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐
tion.
Only keep it in the closed original container and
inaccessible to children.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
Seite 69
Driving
CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
The recommended minimum filling quantity is
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Fill with a mixture of window washing concen‐
trate and water; if needed, add antifreeze ac‐
cording to the manufacturer instructions.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Do not fill in undiluted window washing con‐
centrate and do not fill in pure water; this could
damage the washer system.
Do not mix window washing concentrate from
different manufacturers; this could cause the
washer nozzles to clog.
Manual transmission
Pay attention to the shift plane
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐
vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could
lead to engine damage.◀
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When
the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight
resistance needs to be overcome.
Steptronic transmission
In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears
can also be shifted manually using Steptronic,
refer to page 71.
Parking the vehicle
Secure the vehicle
Before leaving the vehicle with the en‐
gine running, move the selector lever to posi‐
tion P and set the handbrake; otherwise, the
vehicle will begin moving.◀
Disengaging the remote control
To remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, first move the selector lever to position P
and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove
the remote control from the ignition lock, refer
to page 64.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the tachometer
The selector lever position is displayed and the
engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
manual mode.
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Changing selector lever positions
▷ With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P.
▷ When the vehicle is stationary, step on the
brake before shifting out of P or N; other‐
wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.
Press on the brake pedal until you
start driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain pres‐
sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
to start.◀
A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector
lever positions R and P.
To override the lock, press the button on the
front of the selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
front wheels are blocked.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
For example, engage this position in a car
wash. The vehicle can roll.
D Drive
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
sition D.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the Sport program
Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left into the M/S shifting slot.
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐
played. This position is recommended for a per‐
formance-oriented driving style.
To deactivate the Sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Activating the M/S manual mode
Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left into the M/S shifting slot.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The tachometer displays the engaged gear,
e. g. M1.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
Seite 71
Driving
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐
ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not
shift down if the engine speed is too high. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Shifting gears using the shift paddles
on the steering wheel
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ When the shift paddles on the steering
wheel are used to shift gears while in auto‐
matic mode, the transmission switches to
manual mode.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐
ate or shift gears for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to au‐
tomatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane,
manual mode remains active.
▷ Pull one of the two shift paddles:
The transmission shifts up.
▷ Press one of the two shift paddles:
The transmission shifts down.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐
ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not
shift down if the engine speed is too high. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Manually unlocking the selector lever
lock
If the selector lever is locked in position P al‐
though the ignition is switched on, the brake is
depressed, and the button on the selector lever
is pressed, the selector lever lock can be over‐
ridden:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
Pull off the plug-in cable connector if nec‐
essary.
4. Insert the pulling hook 1 from the onboard
vehicle tool kit into the loop on the passen‐
ger side.
5. Pull the loop upward.
6. Move the selector lever into the desired po‐
sition, pressing the button on the front of
the selector lever.
Set the parking brake
Manually unlock the selector lever lock
for towing only. Before manually unlocking the
selector lever lock, pull the parking brake
firmly; otherwise, the vehicle may roll away and
cause personal injury or property damage.◀
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Displays
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Odometer, external tem‐
perature display, clock
At a glance
1 Current speed
2 Odometer, trip odometer, external temper‐
ature, time
3 Resetting the trip odometer
Press the button on the turn indicator lever to
open information in display area 2.
The following information is displayed consecu‐
tively:
▷ Trip odometer
▷ Time
▷ External temperature
Trip odometer
Displaying the trip odometer
Press button 3 briefly.
Resetting the trip odometer
1. Press button 3 briefly.
The trip odometer is displayed.
2. Press button 3 again.
The trip odometer is reset.
Time
Set the time, refer to page 78.
External temperature, external
temperature warning
If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
sounds and a warning light lights up. There is
the increased danger of ice.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on
roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
Units of measure
To set the respective units of measure, miles or
km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the exter‐
nal temperature, refer to page 77.
Seite 73
Displays
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Tachometer
It is imperative that you avoid engine speeds in
the red warning field. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi‐
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 238.
Fuel gauge
The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on the
fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle with
the fuel filler flap.
The vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 216.
Filling capacities, refer to page 269.
Range
After the reserve range is reached:
▷ The remaining LEDs change from orange to
red, arrow.
▷ A message is briefly displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the tach‐
ometer.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine
functions are not ensured.
The message appears continuously below a
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
At the latest, refuel at a range below
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Computer
Opening information in the tachometer
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
Overview of the information
The following information is displayed consecu‐
tively by repeatedly pressing the button on the
turn indicator lever:
▷ Range.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Displays
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ Average speed.
▷ MINI Roadster, MINI Convertible: Always
Open Timer.
To set the corresponding units of measure, re‐
fer to page 77.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 18 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period during which
the engine is running.
With the trip computer, refer to page 75, the
average consumption can be displayed for an
additional distance.
To reset the average consumption: press the
button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐
prox. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. You can
check whether you are currently driving in an
efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle was parked and
the engine was switched off manually are not
included in the average speed calculations.
With the trip computer, refer to page 75, the
average speed can be displayed for an addi‐
tional distance.
To reset the average speed: press the button
on the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec‐
onds.
Displays on the Control Display
Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displays on the "Onboard info":
▷ Range.
▷ Distance to destination.
▷ Estimated time of arrival if a destination
was entered in the navigation system.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
▷ Departure time.
▷ Trip duration.
▷ Trip distance.
Seite 75
Displays
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Both displays show:
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
Resetting the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the MINI joystick.
2. Press the MINI joystick again to confirm
your selection.
Resetting the trip computer
Resetting all values:
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Always Open Timer
Digital Always Open Timer
In the MINI Convertible and MINI Roadster, the
driving times with the convertible top open can
be digitally displayed in the tachometer. Press
the button on the turn indicator lever repeat‐
edly until the driving times are displayed.
1 Total driving time
2 Resetting
3 Current driving time
To reset the current driving time: press the but‐
ton on the turn indicator lever or button 2 for
approx. 2 seconds while the driving times are
displayed.
To reset the total driving time, contact the serv‐
ice center.
Analog Always Open Timer
The analog Always Open Timer indicates the
hours and minutes that were driven with the
convertible top open. A maximum of 6 hours
and 59 minutes can be displayed.
The total driving time is displayed digitally in
the tachometer.
1 Hours display LED
2 Minutes display
Settings and information
Operating concept
Some settings and information can only be cre‐
ated or opened while the ignition is switched
on, the vehicle is standing, and the doors are
closed.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Displays
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
1 Button for:
▷ Selecting the display.
▷ Setting values.
▷ Confirming the selected display or set
values.
▷ Calling up computer information 74.
Symbol Function
Set the rain sensor, refer to
page 68.
Open Check-Control, refer to
page 81.
Exit the menu.
Exiting displays
1. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.
2. Hold the button down.
The current speed is displayed again.
Displays are also exited if no entries are made
within approx. 8 seconds.
Next setting or information
1.
Within a setting or information display,
press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.
2. Hold the button down.
Direct change to the next setting or piece of in‐
formation.
Units of measure
The units of measure, such as for fuel consump‐
tion, route/distance, and temperature, can be
Seite 77
Displays
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
changed. The settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Clock
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and
press the MINI joystick.
5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes
and press the MINI joystick.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the time zone
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired time
zone is displayed and press the MINI joy‐
stick.
The time zone is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Displays
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired day
is displayed and press the MINI joystick.
5. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Settings on the Control
Display
Language
Setting the language
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 25.
Brightness
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, the basic
setting can be changed when the low beams
are switched on.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set‐
ting is selected.
5. Press the MINI joystick.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Seite 79
Displays
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or
switch on the ignition.
The current service requirements can be read
out from the remote control by the service spe‐
cialist.
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
Additional information can be displayed on
each entry:
Select the entry and press the MINI joystick.
To exit from the menu:
Move the MINI joystick to the left.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a le‐
gally mandated inspection is
approaching.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Displays
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the MINI joystick to create the setting.
10. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the MINI joystick to the left.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐
tems being monitored.
A Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal
and text messages at the top of the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors in display
area 1 or 2.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
The symbol indicates that Check Control
messages have been stored. The Check Control
messages can be displayed later.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display in combination with a symbol in the in‐
strument cluster explain a Check Control mes‐
sage and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
a fault or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding light comes on.
Seite 81
Displays
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed con‐
secutively.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However,
they are stored and can be displayed again
later.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
Viewing stored Check Control messages
The stored Check Control messages can only be
displayed while the driver's door is closed.
1. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
2. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐
sponding symbol and "CHECK INFO" ap‐
pear on the display.
4. Press and hold the button.
If there is no Check Control message, this is
indicated by "CHECK OK".
If a Check Control message has been
stored, the corresponding message is dis‐
played.
The text message is also displayed on the
Control Display.
5. Press the button to check for other mes‐
sages.
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Displays
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Displaying on the Control Display
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Seite 83
Displays
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
At a glance
0 Lamps off / daytime running lights
1 Parking lights and daytime running lights
2 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights
3 Automatic headlight control, Adaptive Light
Control, daytime running lights, and wel‐
come lights
Parking lights/low
beams, headlight con‐
trol
General information
When the driver's door is opened with the igni‐
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto‐
matically switched off when the light switch is
in position 0, 2, or 3.
Switch on the parking lights if necessary, switch
position 1.
Parking lights
Switch position 1: the vehicle lights light up on
all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to
page 85.
Low beams
Switch position 2: the low beams are lit when
the ignition is switched on.
Automatic headlight control
Switch position 3: the low beams are switched
on and off automatically depending on the am‐
bient light, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight, or if
there is precipitation. Adaptive Light Control is
active.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain switched on independ‐
ent of the ambient lighting conditions when
you switch on the front fog lights.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐
ment in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Lamps
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually
under these conditions.◀
The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐
ter the vehicle is switched off.
High-beams/roadside parking lights
1 Turn signal/roadside parking light
2 Switching on the high-beams
3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight
flasher
To assist in parking, the vehicle can be illumi‐
nated on one side; note the country-specific
regulations.
The roadside parking lights drain the battery.
Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly
long periods of time; otherwise, the battery
might not have enough power to start the en‐
gine.
Switching on the roadside parking light
To switch on the roadside parking light on the
left or right, press the turn indicator lever up or
down after switching off the vehicle, arrow 1.
Switching off the roadside parking light
Press the lever up or down to the resistance
point.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in switch
position 0, 1, or 3 when the ignition is switched
on.
The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐
ter the vehicle is switched off.
In switch position 1, the parking lights light up
after the ignition is switched off.
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, driving with daytime run‐
ning lights is mandatory; for this reason, day‐
time running lights cannot be deactivated in
these cases.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Welcome lights
If the light switch stays in switch position 2 or 3
after the vehicle is switched off, the parking
lights and the interior lights light up for a cer‐
tain period when the vehicle is unlocked.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after
the ignition is switched off, if the lights are
switched off and the headlight flasher is
switched on.
Seite 85
Lamps
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.: s"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
Activating
With the ignition switch on, turn the light switch
to position 3, refer to page 84.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driver's
side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, Adaptive Light Control
is not active.
Malfunction
The warning light lights up. A message
appears on the Control Display. Adap‐
tive Light Control is malfunctioning or
has failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Fog lights
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster
1 Fog lights
2 Rear fog light
To switch on/off, press the respective button.
MINI Convertible
▷ To switch on the front fog lights:
Press the switch upward.
▷ To switch on the rear fog light:
Press the switch downward.
To switch off, press the respective switch up‐
ward or downward again.
Fog lights
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on. The green indicator lamp lights up
when the front fog lights are switched on.
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Lamps
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
fog lights are switched off when the headlight
flasher or the high-beams are activated.
If the automatic headlight control is activated,
refer to page 84, the low beams are switched
on automatically when the front fog lights are
switched on.
Rear fog light
The low beams or parking lights with front fog
lights must be switched on. The yellow indica‐
tor lamp lights up when the rear fog light is
switched on.
Instrument lighting
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness. The
brightness is increased to a certain limit and is
then reduced again.
▷ Press the button briefly: the brightness
changes in stages.
▷ Press and hold the button: the brightness
changes continuously.
Interior lights
The interior lights, the footwell lights and the
cargo area light are controlled automatically.
To avoid draining the battery, all lights inside
the vehicle are switched off some time after the
ignition is switched off.
Switching interior lights on/off
manually
To switch the interior lights on/off: press the
switch.
If the interior lights are to remain switched off,
press the switch for approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lights
Switching the reading lights on/off
Press the switch.
MINI Roadster with semi-automatic
convertible top
To switch on the interior lights: press the switch
back.
Seite 87
Lamps
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
To switch on the reading lights: press the switch
forward.
To switch off, press the respective switch for‐
ward or back again.
Ambient lighting
The color and brightness of the ambient light‐
ing can be changed.
Press the switch forward: the color changes in
steps.
Press the switch back: the brightness changes
in steps.
Intermediate settings and intermediate colors
are possible.
For continuously changing colors of the ambi‐
ent lighting, press the switch forward for more
than 10 seconds.
For Canadian vehicles:
Continuously changing colors of the ambient
lighting is not available.
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Lamps
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Safety
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Airbags
1 Front airbags
2 Side/head airbags in the seat backrests
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Combined side/head airbag
The combined side/head airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest area and the head.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the opti‐
mal protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do
not attach holders or cables such as for
navigation instruments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
Seite 89
Safety
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explo‐
sives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
which could result in injury.◀
Warning notices and information about the air‐
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by eval‐
uating the impression on the occupied seat sur‐
face of the front passenger seat.
The front and side airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are activated or deactivated accord‐
ingly by the system.
The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
mirror, refer to page 91, shows the current
status of the front passenger airbags, deacti‐
vated or activated.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the
front passenger airbags may not function prop‐
erly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, read the safety and operating instruc‐
tions under Transporting children safely, refer
to page 59.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deactivated
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
cator lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that occupation of the seat cush‐
ion can be detected correctly:
▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion
padding, ball mats, or other items to the
front passenger seat unless they are specifi‐
cally recommended by the manufacturer of
your MINI.
▷ Do not place electronic devices on the pas‐
senger seat if a child restraint fixing system
is mounted on the seat.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Safety
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Indicator light for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are acti‐
vated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child in a child re‐
straint fixing system in‐
tended for the purpose is
properly detected on the
seat. The airbags on the front
passenger side are not acti‐
vated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty. However, the airbags on
the front passenger side are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the system.
Especially the child seats required by NHTSA at
the time that the vehicle was manufactured.
After installing a child seat, make sure that the
indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up. This indicates that the child seat has
been detected and the front passenger airbags
are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
In the radio ready state and beyond, re‐
fer to page 64, the warning light lights
up briefly to indicate that the entire air‐
bag system and the belt tensioners are opera‐
tional.
Airbag system malfunction
▷ Warning light does not light up in the radio
ready state.
▷ Warning light remains permanently on.
Have the airbag system checked without
delay if there is a malfunction
In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐
tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not func‐
tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe ac‐
cident occurs.◀
MINI Convertible: roll‐
over protection system
The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in a sufficiently severe accident or
when the inclination of the longitudinal axis is
extremely high. The protective bars behind the
rear head restraints extend within fractions of a
second.
The rollover protection system increases the
safety of the vehicle occupants in addition to
the reinforced windshield frame.
Seite 91
Safety
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Do not obstruct the area of movement
Always keep the area of movement of the
rollover protection system clear. In light acci‐
dents, you are protected by the fastened safety
belt and, depending on the severity of the acci‐
dent, the belt tightener and the multi-level air
bag restraint system.◀
Lowering
Have the service center check the rollover pro‐
tection system after it is deployed unexpect‐
edly.
General instructions on the rollover pro‐
tection system
When the rollover protection system is ex‐
tended, do not move the convertible top under
any circumstances.
Do not modify the individual components of
the rollover protection system or the wiring in
any way.
Work on the rollover protection system should
only be performed by a MINI service center.
Non-professional work on the system could
lead to failure or a malfunction.
To check the system and to ensure that the sys‐
tem will operate properly over the long-term, it
is imperative that you adhere to the specified
service intervals.◀
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by
comparing the rotational speeds of the individ‐
ual wheels while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter
and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
sured.
Initialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
inflation pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
When the vehicle is driven with a compact
wheel, refer to page 249, the Flat Tire Monitor
is not functional.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Safety
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla‐
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time. The initi‐
alization automatically continues when driving
resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lights come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation
pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 230, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the inflation pressure in
all four tires.
The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 231, can be used for this
purpose.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2.
Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 231, or replace the
damaged wheel, refer to page 248.
Seite 93
Safety
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Run-flat tires
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM
The concept
The system monitors the tire pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires. Sensors in the tire valves measure
the tire pressure.
Notes
Tire damage caused by external influen‐
ces
Sudden tire damage caused by external influ‐
ences cannot be indicated in advance.◀
To operate the system, also note the additional
information and instructions contained under
Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 220.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset while the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, it may
not reliably signal a loss in pressure.
Perform a system reset after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to a new value and after
changing a tire or wheel
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐
sure that the system will operate properly.
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Safety
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated on the
Control Display by the color of the tires and a
text.
All wheels are green
The system is active and issues warnings based
on the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this may be:
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ Malfunction.
Performing a reset
Perform a system reset after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to a new value and after
changing a tire or wheel.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are shown in gray and the status is
displayed.
After a short trip at over 20 mph/30 km/h, the
set tire inflation pressures are adopted as tar‐
get values. The reset is completed automati‐
cally as you drive.
After a successful reset, the wheels appear in
green on the Control Display and "Status: TPM
active" is displayed.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When
driving resumes, the reset is continued auto‐
matically.
Low tire pressure message
The warning lights come on in yellow
and red. A Check Control message is
displayed. A message is displayed on
the onboard monitor. In addition, a sig‐
nal sounds.
▷ There is a flat tire or substantial loss of infla‐
tion pressure on the indicated wheel.
Seite 95
Safety
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues warnings based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 230, are la‐
beled on the tire sidewall with a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐
essary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires. The tire pressure gauge of the
Mobility System, refer to page 231, can be
used for this purpose.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. Reset the system.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 231, or replace the
damaged wheel, refer to page 248.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐
tem, may damage the TPM wheel electron‐
ics. In this case, have the electronics
checked at the next opportunity and have
them replaced if necessary.
Run-flat tires
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. Reset the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Safety
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Message indicating that the inflation
pressure needs to be checked
The yellow warning light lights up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
An additional message is displayed on
the onboard monitor.
▷ The system has detected that a wheel was
changed but a reset was not performed.
▷ The tire was not inflated according to speci‐
fications.
▷ The tire pressure has dropped since the last
confirmation.
In this case:
▷ Check the tire inflation pressure and correct
it if necessary.
▷ After changing a wheel, reset the system.
System limits
The system will not function properly if a reset
was not performed, e.g., it may identify a tire as
flat although the tire is filled to the correct infla‐
tion pressure.
The tire pressure depends on the temperature
of the tire. An increase in the tire temperature,
e.g., while driving or due to sunlight, increases
the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure de‐
creases when the tire temperature drops. In
case of severe temperature drops, this behavior
may lead to a warning on account of the de‐
fined warning limits.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes yellow
and then lights up continuously.
A Check Control message is displayed.
An additional message is displayed on
the onboard monitor.
A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannot
be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted, e.g., a compact wheel:
Have the system checked by the service
center if necessary.
▷ Malfunction:
Have the system checked by the service
center.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
The yellow warning light flashes and
then lights up continuously.
A Check Control message is displayed.
An additional message is displayed on
the onboard monitor.
A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannot
be detected.
Display in the following situation:
▷ Disturbance by other systems or devices
with the same radio frequency:
After leaving the area of the disturbance,
the system automatically becomes active
again.
Seite 97
Safety
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS
138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐
tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐
riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Speed limit
The concept
Enter a speed for which a Check Control mes‐
sage will be displayed when the speed is
reached. This enables you to receive warnings if
you exceed a speed limit in an urban area, for
example.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the MINI joystick to accept the setting.
5. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Safety
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the MINI joystick.
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the MINI joystick.
Seite 99
Safety
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Antilock Brake System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
Steerability is maintained even during full brak‐
ing. This increases active driving safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
When braking in curves or during a lane
change, driving stability and steering response
are improved further.
Brake assistant
When the brakes are applied rapidly, this sys‐
tem automatically produces the maximum
braking force boost. In this way, the system
helps keep the braking distance as short as
possible. This system utilizes all of the benefits
provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of full braking.
Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol DSC
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes to the individual
wheels.
DSC is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Do not reduce the additional safety margin
with a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a
risk of an accident.◀
Deactivating DSC
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Press the button until the DSC OFF indi‐
cator lamp lights up in the speedometer
and DSC OFF appears in the tachome‐
ter. DSC is deactivated. Intervening measures to
stabilize the vehicle and give it forward mo‐
mentum are no longer executed.
When driving with snow chains or to rock the
vehicle free of snow, it may be useful to deacti‐
vate DSC temporarily.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again; the DSC indicator lamps
in the display elements go out.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp in the tachometer
flashes: DSC is controlling the drive
forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC has
failed.
The indicator lamp in the speedometer
lights up and DSC OFF appears in the
tachometer.
DSC and DTC deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol DTC
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward mo‐
mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐
lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐
ited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road
surfaces
▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off
in deep snow, sand, or on loose ground
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Activating DTC
Press the button; the DSC OFF indicator
lamp lights up in the speedometer and
TRACTION appears in the tachometer.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is deactivated,
Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DSC OFF indicator
lamp in the speedometer and TRACTION in the
tachometer go out.
Seite 101
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
In the interest of better forward momentum,
brake intervention is performed in the manner
of a differential lock when the drive wheels spin
unevenly even when DSC/DTC is deactivated.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator lamp in the tachometer
flashes: DTC is controlling the drive
forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC has
failed.
The indicator lamp in the speedometer
lights up and TRACTION appears in the
tachometer.
DTC is activated.
Hill drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradients.
The parking brake is not required.
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin
rolling back.◀
Sport button
When this button is pressed, the vehicle re‐
sponds in an even sportier manner.
▷ The engine responds more spontaneously
to accelerator movements.
▷ The steering responds more directly.
▷ Cooper S, John Cooper Works: the engine
sounds sportier when coasting.
▷ For Steptronic transmissions: more rapid
gear changes in the Sport program.
Activating the system
Press the button; the LED in the button
lights up and SPORT is displayed briefly
in the tachometer.
Deactivating the system
▷ Press the button again.
▷ Switch the engine off.
MINI Coupe, MINI Road‐
ster: automatic rear
spoiler
General information
The automatic rear spoiler increases the driving
stability of the vehicle.
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Note the area of movement
Make sure that the area of movement of
the rear spoiler is clear; otherwise, damage or
injuries may result.◀
Do not use the rear spoiler for pushing, or else
it could be damaged.
Notes on the car washes and care, refer to
page 258.
Automatic operation
If the rear spoiler is retracted, it is in automatic
mode when the engine is started. In this case,
the system is initialized when the vehicle is set
into motion; this may cause a short noise to be
heard.
Automatic extension:
When the vehicle exceeds a speed of ap‐
prox. 50 mph/80 km/h.
Automatic retraction:
When the vehicle drops below a speed of ap‐
prox. 38 mph/60 km/h.
The rear spoiler cannot be manually retracted
in automatic mode at speeds above
38 mph/60 km/h.
Manual mode
Manual mode can, for example, be used to
clean the rear spoiler when the ignition is
switched on or the engine is running. In manual
mode, the LED in the switch is lit.
If the rear spoiler stops in an intermediate posi‐
tion after it is extended and retracted multiple
times, the system is overheated. The rear
spoiler can be operated again after a short
cooling period.
Extending the rear spoiler
Press the switch back.
Retracting the rear spoiler
If the rear spoiler was manually extended and a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h has not been ex‐
ceeded, the rear spoiler can be retracted again.
Otherwise, it can only be retracted after the
speed drops to below 38 mph/60 km/h.
▷ Speed range between 12 mph/20 km/h and
50 mph/80 km/h: press the switch forward
briefly or hold.
▷ Speed below 12 mph/20 km/h: press the
switch forward and hold.
Malfunction
The indicator lamp lights up briefly
when the ignition is switched on and an
acoustic signal is issued.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Display in the following situations:
▷ The rear spoiler is extended.
Retract the rear spoiler manually, or it is re‐
tracted again automatically at ap‐
prox. 12 mph/20 km/h.
▷ The rear spoiler cannot be extended from
the rear spoiler box.
Check whether the rear spoiler is free of
snow or ice, for example. Clear the rear
spoiler or de-ice it.
Seite 103
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
The warning lamp lights up and an
acoustic signal is issued a number of
times.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Display in the following situation:
The rear spoiler cannot be fully extended; re‐
frain from exceeding a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h. Have the system checked.
If a malfunction occurs, Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol DSC is activated at speeds greater than
30 mph/50 km/h.
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
The vehicle stores and maintains the speed
specified using the controls on the steering
wheel.
Do not use cruise control
Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.◀
Controls
At a glance
1 Maintaining, storing, and increasing the
speed
2 Activating/deactivating cruise control
3 Maintaining, storing, and reducing the
speed
4 Resuming cruise control
Switching on
Press button 2.
The indicator lamp lights up in the
speedometer. Cruise control is ready to
operate and can be activated.
Switching off
Press button 2.
▷ When activated: press twice.
▷ When interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored target speed is
cleared.
Interrupting
Press button 2.
The system is interrupted automatically if
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ The clutch pedal is depressed.
Seite 105
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DSC intervenes.
Maintaining, storing the current speed
Press button 1 or button 3.
The current speed is maintained and stored. It
is displayed briefly in the tachometer.
On downhill gradients, it may prove impossible
to maintain the set speed if the engine braking
power is insufficient. On uphill gradients, it may
prove impossible to maintain the set speed if
the engine power output is insufficient.
Increasing speed
▷ Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired
speed is reached.
Each time the button is pressed, the speed
increases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Press and hold button 1 until the desired
speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. After the button is
released, the achieved speed is maintained
and stored.
Decreasing speed
Press button 3 repeatedly or hold it until the
desired speed is reached.
The functions are the same those when the
speed is increased, only that the speed is re‐
duced.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press button 4.
The last stored speed is resumed and main‐
tained.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Display in the tachometer
The selected speed is displayed briefly.
If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears
briefly, conditions may not be adequate to op‐
erate the system.
For better control
The indicator lamp lights up in the
speedometer. Cruise control is ready to
operate and can be activated.
Malfunction
The warning lamp in the tachometer
lights up.
A message appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
The system is malfunctioning or has failed.
Park Distance Control
PDC
The concept
PDC provides support when parking in reverse.
Signal tones and a visual display indicate that
the vehicle is approaching an object behind it.
Measurements are made by four ultrasound
sensors in the bumpers.
The range of these sensors is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ By the two corner sensors at ap‐
prox. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
PDC is a parking aid that can display ob‐
jects when the vehicle approaches them slowly,
as is the case during parking maneuvers. Avoid
driving toward an object quickly as the system
may then be too late in issuing a warning for
technical reasons.◀
Automatic operation
The system is activated after approx. one sec‐
ond when reverse gear or selector lever posi‐
tion R is engaged while the engine is running or
the ignition is switched on. Await this short pe‐
riod before setting the vehicle into motion.
Signal tones
The closer the vehicle is to the object, the
shorter the intervals become. If the distance to
a detected object is less than approx.
12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.
If the distance remains constant, for example
when driving parallel to a wall, the signal tone
is stopped after approx. 3 seconds.
PDC with visual warning
Displaying the approach to an object on the
Control Display. The contours of distant objects
are displayed on the Control Display before a
signal tone is output. The display is shown on
the Control Display as soon as reverse gear or
selector lever position R is engaged.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects
located outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.◀
Malfunction
The warning light lights up. A message
appears on the Control Display. PDC is
malfunctioning or has failed. Have the
system checked.
To ensure full functionality of the sensors, keep
the sensors clean and free of ice. When using
high-pressure washers, do not spray the sen‐
sors for long periods and maintain a distance of
at least 12 in/30 cm.
Seite 107
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Climate
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Air conditioner
1 Air volume
2 Cooling function
3 Recirculated air mode
4 Temperature
5 Rear window defroster
6 Vent settings
7 Windshield heating
Notes
Sufficient ventilation
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu‐
lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the
interior continuously worsens.◀
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Climate
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Air volume
Vary the air volume. The higher
the rate, the more effective the
heating or cooling will be.
The air flow rate may be reduced
or the blower may be switched
off entirely to save on battery power.
Switching the system on/off
Turn the rotary switch for the air volume to 0.
The blower and air conditioner are completely
switched off and the air supply is cut off.
Set any air volume to switch on the air condi‐
tioning.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can
only be cooled with the engine
running.
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as required, according to
the temperature setting.
The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐
sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
To cool the air faster and more intensively
when external temperatures are high, switch
on the recirculated air mode.
Recirculated air mode
If the air outside the car has an
unpleasant odor or contains pol‐
lutants, shut off the supply to the
interior of the car temporarily.
The system then recirculates the
air currently within the vehicle.
Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-
air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off
the recirculated-air mode and increase the air
volume if necessary. Make sure that air can
flow onto the windshield.
Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐
vated at low external temperatures.
Temperature
Turn upward, red, to raise the
temperature.
Turn downward, blue, to lower
the temperature.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
The rear window defroster
power may be lowered or even
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
Vent settings
Direct the flow of air to the win‐
dows , to the upper body
area , or to the footwell .
Intermediate positions are possi‐
ble.
Windshield heating
The windshield heating switches
off automatically after some
time.
The windshield heating may be
reduced or even switched off en‐
tirely to save on battery power.
Defrosting and defogging windows
1.
Set the maximum air volume.
2. Air distribution in position .
By switching on the cooling function, the
windows are defogged more rapidly.
3. Set the highest temperature, red.
Seite 109
Climate
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
4. Deactivate recirculated air mode.
5. Switch on the windshield heating if neces‐
sary.
6. Switch on the rear window defroster if nec‐
essary.
Microfilter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The mi‐
crofilter is changed by the service center during
routine maintenance work.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐
vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐
tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from the
outside air. The service center replaces this
combined filter during routine maintenance.
Automatic climate control
1 Air volume, manual
2 AUTO program
3 Recirculated air mode
4 Maximum cooling
5 Manual air distribution
6 Temperature
7 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
8 Cooling function
9 Rear window defroster
10 Windshield heating
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Climate
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Notes
Sufficient ventilation
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu‐
lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the
interior continuously worsens.◀
Comfortable interior climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis‐
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi‐
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select a
comfortable interior temperature only.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most of these settings are stored for the remote
control in use, Personal Profile settings, refer to
page 31.
Air volume, manual
Press the – button to reduce the
air volume. Press the + button to
increase the air volume.
The automatic mode for the air
volume can be switched on
again using the AUTO button.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power. The display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
Reduce the air volume by pressing the – button
until the system is switched off. All displays go
out.
Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic
climate control back on.
AUTO program
The AUTO program automati‐
cally adjusts the air distribution
to the windshield and side win‐
dows, toward the upper body
area, and into the footwell. The
air volume and your specifications for the tem‐
perature are adjusted to outside influences due
to the seasons, e. g., solar radiation.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
The program is switched off if the air distribu‐
tion is manually adjusted or the button is
pressed again.
Convertible program
When the convertible top is open, the
convertible program is activated. In the
convertible program, the automatic climate
control is optimized for driving with the
convertible top open. In addition, the air flow
rate is increased as vehicle speed increases.
The effectiveness of the convertible program
can be enhanced considerably by installing the
wind deflector.
Recirculated air mode
If the air outside the car has an
unpleasant odor or contains pol‐
lutants, shut off the supply to the
interior of the car temporarily.
The system then recirculates the
air currently within the vehicle.
Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-
air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off
the recirculated-air mode and increase the air
volume if necessary. Make sure that air can
flow onto the windshield.
Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐
vated at low external temperatures.
Seite 111
Climate
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Maximum cooling
Automatic climate control
switches to the lowest tempera‐
ture, a high air volume, and re‐
circulated air mode.
For maximum cooling, open the
vents for the upper body area.
The air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature above
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
Manual air distribution
The flow of air is directed, as se‐
lected, to the windows, to the
upper body area, or to the foot‐
well.
The automatic mode for the air
distribution can be switched back on using the
AUTO button.
Temperature
Set the desired temperature in‐
dividually.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible regardless of
the season, using maximum cooling or heating
power if necessary, and then maintains it.
When switching between different temperature
settings in rapid succession, the automatic cli‐
mate control does not have sufficient time to
adjust the set temperature.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
Defrosting and defogging windows
Quickly removes ice and con‐
densation from the windshield
and front side windows. For this
purpose, also switch on the cool‐
ing function.
The windshield heating switches on automati‐
cally.
Windshield heating
The windshield heating switches
off automatically after some
time.
Cooling function
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as required,
according to the temperature
setting. The passenger compart‐
ment can only be cooled with the engine run‐
ning.
The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐
sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started. Recir‐
culated air mode is switched on automatically if
necessary.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally when the AUTO button is pressed.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐
vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐
tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from the
outside air. The service center replaces this
combined filter during routine maintenance.
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Climate
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Ventilation
1 Knob for continuous opening and closing
2 Nozzle for direction of air flow
Opening/closing
Turn the knob.
Direction of air flow
Pivot the entire nozzle.
Seite 113
Climate
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Sun visor
Glare protection
Folding down
Fold the sun visor down.
Folding up
Fold the sun visor up.
Glare protection from the side
Folding down
1.
Fold the sun visor down.
2. Detach from the holder and pivot sideways
to the side window.
Folding up
To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse order.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located behind a cover on
each sun visor.
To open, slide the cover to the side.
Cupholders and ashtray/
lighter
Cupholders
Two cupholders are located in the center con‐
sole in the front and another at the end of the
center console in the rear.
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
age.◀
Ashtray
The ashtray is located in one of the cupholders
in the center console at the front.
Emptying
Take out the entire ashtray, arrow.
When installing, ensure that the ashtray is in‐
serted in the cupholder with the adapter.
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition
switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Connecting electrical de‐
vices
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volt.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Do not connect the charger to the socket
Do not connect the battery charger to the
socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as
this could damage the battery.◀
Replace the cover after use
Replace the lighter or socket cover after
use; otherwise, objects that fall into the lighter
socket or power socket could cause a short cir‐
cuit.◀
Socket in the center console
Remove the cover or lighter, refer to page 115,
from the socket.
Socket in the cargo area
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster
Take out the cover.
MINI Convertible
Take out the cover.
Seite 115
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Cargo area
MINI Coupe: cargo cover
Do not place objects on the covers
Do not place objects on the cover; if you
do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu‐
pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or
damage the cover.◀
The MINI Coupe is equipped with two cargo
covers. When the tailgate is opened, the rear
cargo cover is raised.
The covers can be removed individually.
Front cover
Pull the cover backwards out of the brackets,
arrow 1.
Rear cover
1.
Pull the releases, arrow 1, on the left and
right.
2. Pull the cover down out of the brackets, ar‐
row 2.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: through-
loading opening
Securing cargo
Always secure transported snowboards or
similar objects as they could otherwise endan‐
ger occupants during braking or swerving.◀
1. Fold the seat forward if necessary.
2. Unlock the lock using the integrated key,
refer to page 30.
3. Pull the handle and fold down the lid.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: storage
compartment in cargo area
The front of the cargo area contains a storage
compartment under a cover panel.
The figure shows an example of the cargo area
of the MINI Coupe.
1.
Open the through-loading opening from
the passenger compartment.
2. Fold up the cover panel, arrow 1.
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
MINI Convertible: cargo area
Do not place objects on the cargo cover
Do not place objects on the cargo cover;
otherwise, the cover or the convertible top
could be damaged.◀
Loading aid
When the convertible top is closed, unlocking
and folding up the convertible top may make it
easier to load the vehicle.
1. Unlock the convertible top with the han‐
dles, see arrows 1.
2. Raise the convertible top, see arrow 2.
3. Fold back the handles and rest them on the
brackets 3.
Enlarging the cargo area
When the convertible top is closed, the cargo
area can be enlarged.
1.
Fold the convertible top upward, refer to
Loading aid.
2. Pull the trunk cover backwards out of the
lower holders and swing up, see arrows 1.
3. Slide into the upper holders, arrows 2, and
set down horizontally.
Move the trunk cover back into the lower posi‐
tion so that the convertible top can be oper‐
ated.
Through-loading system
To enable the transport of larger objects, the
rear seat backrest can be folded down.
1. Using the integrated key, unlock the lock 1
of the rear seat backrest.
2. Press button 2 and fold the rear seat back‐
rest forward while guiding the safety belt.
3. Fold down the backrest.
Locking the backrest
Before taking along passengers in the
rear, fold back the backrests. When folding
back, ensure that the locks engage properly;
otherwise, cargo could be catapulted forward
into the passenger compartment during brak‐
ing maneuvers and swerving, endangering the
occupants.
The belt guide loop must be closed.◀
Seite 117
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Notes
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐
partment without securing them; otherwise,
they may present a danger to occupants for in‐
stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐
vers.◀
No non-slip mats on the dashboard
Do not use non-slip materials, such as
non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be
damaged by the substances in the materials.◀
Storage compartments
Interior
▷ Glove compartment, refer to page 118.
▷ Center armrest, refer to page 119.
▷ Storage compartment on the front passen‐
ger side, refer to page 119.
▷ Compartments in the center console.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Compartments next to the rear seats.
▷ MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: rear storage
shelf behind the seats, refer to page 120.
▷ Nets on the back of the front seat backrests
and in the front passenger footwell.
▷ Cupholders, refer to page 114.
Cargo area
▷ Net on the cargo area floor and on the side
trim.
▷ Lashing eyes, refer to page 129.
▷ MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: storage com‐
partment in the cargo area, refer to
page 116.
Glove compartment
Opening
Press the button to open the lid.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster:
locking
Lock the glove compartment using the
integrated key of the remote control, refer to
page 30.
Ventilation
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
glove compartment can be ventilated and, if
the cooling function is switched on, cooled.
Opening
Turn the switch in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
Move the switch to the vertical position by
turning it in the opposite direction of the arrow.
USB interface for data transfer
Updating the navigation data, refer to
page 136, from the USB medium via the USB
interface in the glove compartment.
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest
The center armrest between the front seats
contains a storage compartment or a cover for
the snap-in adapter, refer to page 202, de‐
pending on the version.
Opening
The lid is mounted on rails and can be fully
opened by sliding it back and lifting.
Closing
Slide the lid forward.
Storage compartment on
the passenger side
Opening
Briefly press the bottom edge of the cover
panel.
Closing
Push back the cover panel to the initial posi‐
tion.
Seite 119
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Close the storage compartment again im‐
mediately after use.
Close the storage compartment again immedi‐
ately after use while driving; otherwise, injury
may occur during accidents.◀
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster
The storage compartment cannot be locked.
MINI Coupe, MINI Road‐
ster: rear storage shelf
behind the seats
This space can be used to store briefcases, for
example.
No heavy objects
Only transport light and small objects on
the rear storage shelf; otherwise, braking ma‐
neuvers and swerving may lead to a safety haz‐
ard due to objects flying about the passenger
compartment. Only transport heavy luggage in
the cargo area if it has been appropriately se‐
cured.◀
Connection for an exter‐
nal audio device
This can be used to connect an external audio
device, refer to page 171, such as a CD or MP3
player.
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Seite 121
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at various engine and vehicle speeds, but
do not exceed:
▷ For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in
period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and discs. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The clutch requires an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to function at an op‐
timal level.
During this break-in period, engage the clutch
gently.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Ground clearance
Ensure adequate ground clearance
Ensure adequate ground clearance, e.g.,
when driving into underground garages, when
driving over curbs, or when driving in winter;
otherwise, damage may occur to the vehicle.◀
Seite 124
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Closing the tailgate
Drive with the tailgate closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, passengers and other road users may be
endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if
an accident occurs or during braking or swerv‐
ing. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the
passenger compartment.◀
If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with
the tailgate open:
▷ Drive moderately.
▷ Coupe: close all windows.
▷ Switch off recirculated air mode and greatly
increase the blower speed.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot
exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐
ous personal injury as well as property damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,
there is the danger of getting burned.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is not recommended to use mobile phones,
such as mobile phones without a direct con‐
nection to an external aerial in the vehicle's
passenger compartment. Otherwise, the vehi‐
cle electronics and mobile communication de‐
vices can interfere with each other. In addition,
there is no assurance that the radiation gener‐
ated during transmission will be discharged
from the vehicle interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire
tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,
refer to page 228.
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to
6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the
electrical systems and the transmission may be
damaged.◀
Using the parking brake on inclines
Using the parking brake
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle sta‐
tionary with a slipping clutch for extended pe‐
riod; use the parking brake instead. Otherwise,
the clutch will be subject to increased wear.◀
Support from the hill drive-off assistant, refer to
page 102.
Seite 125
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Braking safely
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
You can still avoid any obstacles with a mini‐
mum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Do not let your foot rest on the brake
pedal
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake
pedal. Even light but consistent pedal pressure
can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and
possibly even brake failure.◀
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again when they are returned after being re‐
moved, such as for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Oth‐
erwise, the brake system may overheat, result‐
ing in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
necessary.
Downshifting in manual mode of the Steptronic
transmission, refer to page 71.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and
possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Never drive with the transmission in neu‐
tral, with the engine switched off or with the
clutch depressed; otherwise, you will have nei‐
ther the braking action of the engine or nor its
power assistance when braking or steering.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Seite 126
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
When the vehicle is parked
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops that exits under‐
neath the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are normal.
After the engine is switched off, the coolant
pump may continue running for some time in
the MINI Cooper S. This causes noises in the en‐
gine compartment.
Seite 127
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Loading
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐
ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐
hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and
increases the rate at which damage develops
inside the tires. This could result in a sudden
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the cargo area
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀
Determining the load
limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle's placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
Seite 128
DRIVING TIPS
Loading
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transfered to your
vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting
a trailer to determine how this may reduce
the available cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity of your vehicle.
Load
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
MINI Convertible:
Stowing cargo
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as
low as possible, ideally directly behind the
backrests.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Place protective material around any sharp-
edged or pointed objects that could bump
against the rear window while the vehicle is
in motion.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster
MINI Convertible
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster
Seite 129
Loading
DRIVING TIPS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
MINI Convertible
Securing cargo
▷ Secure smaller and lighter pieces with tight‐
ening belts or straps.
▷ Secure larger and heavier pieces with cargo
straps.
Adhere to the information included with
the cargo straps.
▷ Four lashing eyes are available for fastening
the cargo straps. Two of them are located
on the inside wall of the cargo area.
Securing cargo
Stow and secure the cargo as described
above; otherwise it may present a danger to
the occupants, for instance during braking and
avoidance maneuvers.
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the
passenger compartment without securing
them; otherwise, they may present a danger to
occupants, for instance during braking and
avoidance maneuvers.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, as
excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and
may also place you in violation of traffic safety
laws.
Do not secure cargo using the upper LATCH
mounting points, refer to page 61; otherwise,
these may become damaged.◀
Rear luggage rack
Notes
A special rear rack is available as an optional
accessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.
Follow the installation instructions for the rear
rack.
Anchorage points
The anchorage points are under the covers in
the bumper.
Push out the covers on the corresponding cut‐
outs.
Loading
When loading the vehicle, ensure that the ap‐
proved gross vehicle weight and the axle loads
are not exceeded. Adhere to the weight specifi‐
cations in the technical data.
Seite 130
DRIVING TIPS
Loading
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors. The implementation of certain
measures, driving style and regular mainte‐
nance can have an influence on fuel consump‐
tion and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts following use
Remove rear-mounted luggage racks after use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close both windows
Open windows causes higher air resistance and
thus increases fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
tion pressure, refer to page 220, at least twice
a month and before starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. To
achieve this, maintain a suitable distance to the
vehicle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐
ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and coast to a halt in the
highest applicable gear.
Seite 131
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the ac‐
celerator and coast in a suitable gear.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during longer
stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Fuel savings are already achieved after the en‐
gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.
Switch off any functions that are not
currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by the serv‐
ice center.
Please also note the MINI maintenance system,
refer to page 239.
Seite 132
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Seite 133
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
FOLLOW ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
guide you to every entered destination.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applica‐
ble traffic regulations in the event of any con‐
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.◀
Opening the navigation system
1.
"Navigation"
During destination guidance, the arrow or map
view appears on the Control Display.
Navigation data
Information on navigation data
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version"
Information is displayed on the data ver‐
sion.
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
can be updated.
Current navigation data and the authorization
code are available from your service center.
▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
date may take several hours.
▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
▷ The data are stored in the vehicle.
▷ After the updating process is complete, the
system restarts.
▷ Remove the medium with the navigation
data after the update.
Performing the update
1.
Depending on the equipment: insert the
USB device with the navigation data into
the USB interface in the glove compartment
or in the USB audio interface.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Seite 136
NAVIGATION
Navigation system
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Enter the authorization code of the USB de‐
vice with the navigation data.
4. Drive off.
The update starts after the authorization code
is entered.
When the update is completed, the system re‐
starts.
Seite 137
Navigation system
NAVIGATION
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Destination entry
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
At a glance
In entering your destination, it is possible to se‐
lect from the following options:
▷ Enter the destination manually, see below.
▷ Select the destination from the address
book, refer to page 140.
▷ Last destinations, refer to page 141.
▷ Special destinations, refer to page 142.
▷ Destination entry via map, refer to
page 143.
▷ Using the home address as the destination,
refer to page 141.
▷ Destination entry by voice, refer to
page 144.
Manual destination en‐
try
General information
The system supports you in entering street
names and house numbers by automatically
completing the entry and providing entry com‐
parisons, refer to page 23.
Stored town/city and street names can be
called up quickly.
▷ If the existing entries should not be
changed, the entries for the state/province
and town/city can be skipped.
▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/
city center if no street is entered.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Entering a town/city
1.
Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
Seite 138
NAVIGATION
Destination entry
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Move the MINI joystick to the right.
4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.
The associated destination town/city is dis‐
played.
Entering a street and intersection
1.
Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1.
Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1.
Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Street does not exist in the destination
city/town
The desired street does not exist in the speci‐
fied city/town because it belongs to another
part of the city/town.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with the state/province currently
displayed.
All streets of the selected state/province are
offered. The associated town/city is dis‐
played after the street name.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street.
9. Select the street.
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1.
"Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Seite 139
Destination entry
NAVIGATION
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Add, refer to page 146, a destination as a
further destination.
Address book
Create contacts, refer to page 189.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as des‐
tinations in the contacts.
If the contacts with addresses from the mo‐
bile phone are not displayed, they first
need to be checked as destinations, refer to
page 191.
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with
"A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
Storing the destination in the address
book
After entering the destination, store the desti‐
nation in the address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
6. Select an existing contact, if available.
7. "Business address" or "Home address"
8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
9. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
The current position can be stored in the ad‐
dress book.
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
Seite 140
NAVIGATION
Destination entry
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
isting contact from the list. Select the type
of address and enter the first and last
name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the
destination
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 190.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
At a glance
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically. These destinations can be called
up and used as a destination for destination
guidance.
Calling up the last destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
Starting destination guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Seite 141
Destination entry
NAVIGATION
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Editing the destination
Destinations can be edited, for example to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
Special destinations
General information
Even with the latest navigation data, informa‐
tion on individual Points of Interest may have
changed; for example, gas stations might not
be in operation.
Opening the search for Points of
Interest
Selection of Points of Interest, such as hotels or
tourist attractions.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. Select the search function.
A-Z search
1.
"A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter the town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select the category.
6. "Category details"
For some Points of Interest, it may be possi‐
ble to select multiple category details.
Move the MINI joystick to the left to leave
the category details.
7. "Keyword"
8. Enter the keyword.
A list of the Points of Interest is displayed.
9. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connec‐
tion can be established if necessary.
10. Select the symbol.
11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 146.
Category search
1.
"Category search"
2. "Search destination"
3. Select or enter the town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select the category.
6. "Category details"
For some Points of Interest, it may be possi‐
ble to select multiple category details.
Move the MINI joystick to the left to leave
the category details.
7. "Start search"
A list of the Points of Interest is displayed.
8. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
Seite 142
NAVIGATION
Destination entry
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
If a phone number is available, a connec‐
tion can be established if necessary.
9. Select the symbol.
10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 146.
Position of Points of Interest
When entering the search location, various op‐
tions can be selected.
▷ "At current location"
▷ "At destination"
▷ "At different location"
▷ If destination guidance is active: "Along
route"
Starting the search for Points of Interest
1.
"Start search"
2. A list of the Points of Interest is displayed.
▷ "At current location"
The Points of Interest are listed accord‐
ing to their distance and are displayed
with a directional arrow pointing to the
destination.
▷ "At destination", "At different location",
"Along route"
Special destinations are listed according
to their distance from the location
where the search is being performed.
▷ Destinations of the selected category
are displayed in the map view as sym‐
bols. The display depends on the map
scale and the category.
3. Highlight the special destination.
4. Select a special destination.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
The direct distance to destination is dis‐
played.
Displaying Points of Interest in the map
To display symbols of the Points of Interest in
the map view:
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.
Destination entry by map
General information
If only the location of the destination town/city
or street is known, the destination can be en‐
tered using the map.
Selecting the destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the map.
Seite 143
Destination entry
NAVIGATION
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. "Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
▷ To change the scale: turn the MINI joy‐
stick.
▷ To shift the map: move the MINI joy‐
stick in the required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
MINI joystick in the required direction
and turn the MINI joystick.
5. Press the MINI joystick to display additional
menu items.
▷ Select the symbol: "Start guidance"
or "Add as another destination".
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for
Points of Interest is started.
Specifying the street
If the system does not recognize the street, one
of the following pieces of information is dis‐
played:
▷ A street name in the vicinity.
▷ The coordinates of the destination.
Additional functions
On the interactive map, the scale can be ad‐
justed and the map section can be shifted.
Pressing the MINI joysticks makes additional
functions available:
▷ Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
▷ Map view
▷ "Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.
▷ "Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for
Points of Interest is started.
Destination entry by
voice
General information
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 24.
▷ When making a destination entry by voice,
you can change between voice activation
and the onboard monitor.
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
Saying the entries
▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐
tersections can be said as whole words or
spelled in the language of the system, refer
to page 79.
Seite 144
NAVIGATION
Destination entry
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Example: to enter a town/city in a US states
as a whole word, the language of the sys‐
tem must be English.
▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and
the language of the system differ.
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
▷ The methods of entry depend on the navi‐
gation data in use and the country and lan‐
guage settings.
Entering a town/city separately
The town/city can be said as a complete word.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
least the first three letters.
5. Select a location:
▷ Select a recommended town/city: ›Yes‹.
▷ Select a different town/city: ›New
entry‹.
▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹, for instance,
entry 2.
▷ Spell an entry: ›Spell city‹.
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in
a list and displayed as one location followed by
an ellipsis.
1.
Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹, e. g., En‐
try 2.
2. Select the desired town/city.
The town/city can also be selected from the
list on the onboard monitor:
Turn the MINI joystick until the destination
town/city is selected and press the
MINI joystick.
Entering a street or intersection
separately
Enter a street and intersection in the same way
as you would enter a town/city.
Entering a house number separately
Depending on the data in the navigation sys‐
tem, house numbers up to number 2,000 can
be entered.
1.
›House number‹
2. Say the house number.
3. ›Yes‹ to confirm the house number.
4. ›Accept destination‹
Starting destination guidance
›Start guidance‹
Adding further intermediate
destinations
›Add as another destination‹
Further intermediate destinations can be
added.
Storing a destination
The destination is automatically added to the
list of last destinations.
Planning a trip with in‐
termediate destinations
New trip
Various intermediate destinations can be en‐
tered for a trip. The trip destination needs to be
entered first, destination entry, refer to
page 138.
Seite 145
Destination entry
NAVIGATION
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations
can be entered for a trip.
1. "Navigation"
2. Select the type of destination entry and en‐
ter the intermediate destination.
3. "Add as another destination"
4. Select the position where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted.
Starting the trip
After all intermediate destinations have been
entered:
"Start guidance"
Seite 146
NAVIGATION
Destination entry
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Starting destination
guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. Make a destination entry, refer to
page 138.
3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
The route is shown on the Control Display.
The distance to the destination/intermediate
destination and the estimated time of arrival
are displayed in the map view.
The arrow view may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Terminating destination
guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
▷ The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria.
▷ The route criteria can be changed when the
destination is entered and during destina‐
tion guidance.
▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into consideration when
planning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
▷ The recommended route may differ from
the route you would take based on per‐
sonal experience.
▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
refer to page 153.
Changing the route criteria
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Select the criterion:
▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route,
being a combination of the shortest
possible route and the fastest roads.
▷ "Efficient route": optimized combi‐
nation of the fastest and shortest route.
Seite 147
Destination guidance
NAVIGATION
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ "Short route": short distance, irre‐
spective of how fast or slow progress
will be.
▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐
native routes are suggested during ac‐
tive destination guidance.
5. Select additional criteria for the route, if
necessary. Where possible, the selected cri‐
teria are avoided on the route.
▷ "Avoid highways": highways are
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
Route
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
▷ Arrow view.
▷ List of route sections.
▷ Map view, refer to page 150.
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow: indicates the current direction
of travel.
▷ Street name of the road currently being
driven on.
▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in
direction.
▷ Intersection view.
▷ Lane information.
▷ Traffic bulletins.
▷ Distance to the next change in direction.
▷ Street name at the next change in direc‐
tion.
Lane information
On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
▷ Solid triangle: best lane.
▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an‐
other lane change may be needed shortly.
Displaying a list of route sections
When destination guidance is active, a list of
the route sections can be displayed. The driving
distance and traffic bulletins are displayed for
each route section.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a route section.
Bypassing a section of
the route
Calculate a new route for a route section.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
Seite 148
NAVIGATION
Destination guidance
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. "New route for"
4. Turn the MINI joystick. Enter the number of
kilometers within which you would like to
return to the original route.
5. Press the MINI joystick.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be by‐
passed:
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommenda‐
tion
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐
tions along the route are displayed if needed.
Even with the latest navigation data, informa‐
tion on individual Points of Interest may have
changed; for example, gas stations might not
be in operation.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station.
5. Select the gas station.
6. Select the symbol.
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas sta‐
tion is added to the route.
Destination guidance
through voice instruc‐
tions
Switching spoken instructions on/off
The spoken instructions can be switched on or
off during destination guidance.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
Symbol Function
The spoken instructions are switched
on.
Spoken instructions are switched off.
Repeating a spoken instruction
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the MINI joystick twice.
Volume of spoken instructions
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
Seite 149
Destination guidance
NAVIGATION
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
This volume is independent of the volume of
the audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Map view
Selecting the map view
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
At a glance
1 Function bar
2 Route section with traffic obstruction
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
4 Planned route
5 Current location
6 Upper status field
7 Lower status field
Lines in the map
Streets and routes are displayed in different
colors and styles depending on their classifica‐
tion. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry
connections. Country borders are indicated by
thin lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route indicate
route sections with traffic obstructions, de‐
pending on the map scale. The direction of the
triangles indicates the direction of the obstruc‐
tion.
The traffic signs indicate the significance of the
obstruction.
▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
planned route or direction.
▷ Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 151.
Planned route
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.
Status fields
To show/hide: press the MINI joystick.
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐
tertainment details.
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Function bar
The following functions are available in the
function bar:
Symbol Function
Start/end destination guidance.
Switch spoken instructions on/
off.
Change the route criteria.
Search for a special destina‐
tion.
Seite 150
NAVIGATION
Destination guidance
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Symbol Function
Display traffic bulletins.
Open the interactive map.
Adjust the map views.
Adjust the arrow view.
Change the scale.
Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
▷ To shift the map: move the MINI joystick in
the required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
MINI joystick in the required direction and
turn the MINI joystick.
Changing the scale
1.
Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the MINI joystick.
Automatically scaled map scale
In the map view facing north, turn the MINI joy‐
stick in any direction until the AUTO is dis‐
played for the scale. The entire route between
the current location and the destination is dis‐
played on the map.
Settings for the map view
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. To set the map view:
▷ "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
the setting is disregarded.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying
traffic bulletins.
Symbols for the Points of Interest are no
longer displayed.
Arrow view
When destination guidance is activated, the ar‐
row view can additionally be displayed in the
map view on the right side of the display.
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Arrow display on map"
The arrow view is shown on the map.
Traffic bulletins
At a glance
▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐
tion of a traffic information service. Infor‐
mation on traffic obstructions and hazards
is updated continuously.
▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the
map by symbols.
The symbol in the function bar of the map
view turns red if there are traffic bulletins that
affect the calculated route.
Seite 151
Destination guidance
NAVIGATION
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain MINI models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to
use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-
User is in material breach of the terms and con‐
ditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net‐
work") holds the rights to the traffic incident
data and RDS-TMC network through which it is
delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or
use any other method to reproduce, duplicate,
republish, transmit or distribute in any way any
portion of traffic incident data. You agree to in‐
demnify, defend and hold harmless MINI of
North America, LLC. ("MINI NA") and Total Traf‐
fic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates)
against any and all claims, damages, costs or
other expenses that arise directly or indirectly
out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic
incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your
violation of this directive and/or (c) any unau‐
thorized or unlawful activities by you in con‐
nection herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa‐
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, MINI NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit‐
ted by law, all warranties or representations
with respect to the licensed material (including,
without limitation, that the licensed material
will be error-free, will operate without interrup‐
tion or that the traffic data will be accurate), ex‐
press, implied or statutory, including, without
limitation, the implied warranties of merchant‐
ability, non-infringement fitness for a particular
purpose, or those arising from a course of deal‐
ing or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or
MINI NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
damages (including, without limitation, lost
revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relat‐
ing to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or
MINI NA are aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse‐
quential damages, so those particular limita‐
tions may not apply to you.
Switching the reception on/off
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Open the traffic bulletins
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
First, traffic bulletins for the calculated
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐
tance from the current position of the vehi‐
cle.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information": display additional
information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if required.
Traffic bulletins on the map
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
Seite 152
NAVIGATION
Destination guidance
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
The Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of the
traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre‐
garded in this setting. Symbols and Points of In‐
terest are not displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
played.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐
tion's length, direction, and impact are dis‐
played in the map using triangles or gray bars
along the calculated route.
▷ Red: traffic congestion.
▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Yellow: heavy traffic.
▷ Green: clear roads.
▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road
construction.
The displayed information depends on the par‐
ticular traffic information service.
Filtering traffic bulletins
You can set which traffic bulletins appear on
the map.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired category.
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are
displayed on the map.
▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the
route are always shown.
▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
notify you of potentially dangerous situa‐
tions cannot be hidden.
Destination guidance with traffic
bulletins
General information
Detour suggestions from the navigation system
can be manually accepted when using semi-dy‐
namic destination guidance. When using dy‐
namic destination guidance, they are automati‐
cally accepted for route guidance.
Semi-dynamic destination guidance
When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
The destination guidance system takes the
available traffic bulletins into account. A mes‐
sage is displayed depending on the route, the
traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic
obstructions. In addition, distance and time dif‐
ferences between the original route and the
detour are displayed.
Accepting the detour
"Detour"
Seite 153
Destination guidance
NAVIGATION
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
tour suggestion.
Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes‐
sages are called up in the list.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.
Activating dynamic destination guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Seite 154
NAVIGATION
Destination guidance
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
What to do if...
What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot be
displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information
is not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown
can be determined. Input any street in the
selected city and start destination guid‐
ance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data are not contained in
the navigation data. Select a destination
that is as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a goal that is as close
as possible to the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins.
▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
tions?
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calcu‐
late a new route suggestion.
▷ Does the navigation system fail to react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes up
to 10 minutes for the system to becoming
functional again.
Seite 155
What to do if...
NAVIGATION
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
ROCK ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Tone
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Treble, bass, balance,
and fader
▷ "Treble": treble adjustment.
▷ "Bass": depth adjustment.
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone settings.
4. To set: turn the MINI joystick.
5. To save: press the MINI joystick.
Volume
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared
to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
tertainment sound output.
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".
Adjusting the volume
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
Seite 158
ENTERTAINMENT
Tone
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To set: turn the MINI joystick.
6. To save: press the MINI joystick.
Resetting the tone set‐
tings
All tone settings can be reset to the default set‐
ting.
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Seite 159
Tone
ENTERTAINMENT
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Radio
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Controls
1 CD drive
2 Changing the waveband
3 Changing the audio source
4 Volume, on/off
5 Change station/track
6 Ejecting the CD
Sound output
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
This symbol at the upper edge of the Con‐
trol Display indicates that the sound is switched
off.
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
On the onboard monitor:
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
Seite 160
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Select the desired station.
Selecting the waveband using the
button on the radio
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired waveband is displayed.
Changing the station
Turn and press the MINI joystick
or
Press the button
or
Press the buttons on the steering wheel.
All saved stations are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Storing a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Highlight the desired station.
4. Press the MINI joystick.
5. Select the desired memory location.
Press and hold the MINI joystick to store a sta‐
tion that is displayed in the station list but is not
being played.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select a frequency: turn the MINI joy‐
stick.
To save a station: press and hold the
MINI joystick.
RDS
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as
the station name, in the FM wave band.
Switching the RDS on/off
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM"
Seite 161
Radio
ENTERTAINMENT
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
HD Radio™ reception
Many stations broadcast both analog and digi‐
tal signals.
License conditions
HD Radio Technology manufactured under li‐
cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.
and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD,
HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade‐
marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
when the audio signal is digital.
When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it
may take several seconds for the station to be
played back in digital quality.
Note on HD stations whose station name ends
in ...HD or HD1:
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, the playback switches
between analog and digital reception. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Note on HD multicast stations whose station
name ends in ...HD2, ...HD3, ...:
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, the audible signal
may be interrupted for several seconds. This is
reception related.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist.
1.
Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station
also broadcasts additional substations. The sta‐
tion name of the main station ends in HD1. Sta‐
tion names of the substations end in HD2, HD3,
etc.
1.
Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is
muted.
Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.
Seite 162
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Navigation bar overview
Symbol Function
Change the list view.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites category/
open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed view
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
status line.
Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels category.
5. Select the desired channel.
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐
nel enabled.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again
via this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the channels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Seite 163
Radio
ENTERTAINMENT
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Via the onboard monitor
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
Via the buttons in the area of the CD
player
Press the button.
The next channel is selected.
Via direct channel entry
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired
channel is reached and press the MINI joy‐
stick.
Storing a channel
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the MINI joystick again.
6. Press the MINI joystick again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing the list view
The list view changes every time the first sym‐
bol on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Channel name
Artist
Track
Selecting a category
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal
must be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a de‐
lay following the live broadcast. When the buf‐
fer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The
buffer is cleared when a new channel is se‐
lected.
Seite 164
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Opening the timeshift function
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
displayed next to the buffer bar.
▷ For live transmissions "live".
Timeshift menu
Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic timeshift deactivated/
activated
Automatic timeshift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
▷ Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
Activating
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
Deactivating
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,
league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐
rently being broadcast. The channel informa‐
tion must be available.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the MINI joystick again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Storing the league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
Seite 165
Radio
ENTERTAINMENT
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Opening the favorites
If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐
onds "Favorite alert!".
"Favorites"
Select the symbol while the message is shown.
The displayed favorite is played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All favorites cur‐
rently being broadcast can be selected from a
list.
Managing the favorites
Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.
1.
"Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐
ites.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broadcast
as soon as it is available.
A new panel opens.
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast shortly.
Information is currently being broad‐
cast.
Seite 166
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius performs an update
of the channel names and positions. The up‐
date takes place automatically and may take
several minutes.
Notes
▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐
uations, such as under certain environmen‐
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio has no influence on this.
▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels
or underground garages; next to tall build‐
ings; or near trees, mountains or other
powerful sources of radio interference.
Stored stations
General information
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
Deleting a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Seite 167
Radio
ENTERTAINMENT
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Sound output
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
This symbol at the upper edge of the Con‐
trol Display indicates that the sound is switched
off.
CD player
Playback
Inserting the CD
Insert the CD with the printed side facing up.
Playback begins automatically.
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Starting playback
A CD is contained in the CD player.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD"
3. Select the desired track. Press the MINI joy‐
stick to start playback.
Playable formats
▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA.
▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC.
Ejecting the CD
Press the button on the CD player.
The CD emerges slightly from the drive.
Seite 168
ENTERTAINMENT
CD/multimedia
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button for the appropri‐
ate direction as often as necessary until the de‐
sired track is played back.
Selecting the track on the onboard
monitor
Audio CDs
Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs with compressed audio files
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD may not be displayed correctly.
1.
Select the directory if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the MINI joystick to the left.
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Displaying information on the track
If information about a track has been stored, it
is displayed automatically:
▷ Artist.
▷ Album track.
▷ Number of tracks on the CD.
▷ File name of track.
Random playback
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD"
3. Select the desired CD.
Seite 169
CD/multimedia
ENTERTAINMENT
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
To switch off random playback: press the
MINI joystick.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction.
Automatic repeat
The selected track, directories, or CDs are re‐
peated automatically.
Notes
CD player
Do not remove the cover
The CD players are officially designated
Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the
cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye dam‐
age can result.◀
CDs
Using CDs
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs with la‐
bels applied, as these can become
detached during playback due to
heat buildup and can cause irrepara‐
ble damage to the device.
▷ Only use round CDs with a standard diame‐
ter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs
with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise,
the CDs or the adapter may jam and no lon‐
ger eject.◀
General malfunctions
▷ The CD players have been optimized for
performance in vehicles. In some instances
they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs
than stationary devices would be.
▷ If a CD cannot be played, first check if it has
been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa‐
tion on the CD or the laser's scan lens, and tem‐
porarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with particular CDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs,
this can be due to one of the following causes:
Self-recorded CDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs are inconsistent data creation
or recording processes, or poor quality or
old age of the blank CD.
▷ Only label CDs on the upper side with a pen
intended for this purpose.
Damage
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷ Store CDs in a sleeve.
▷ Do not subject CDs to temperatures over
50 ℃/122 ℉, high humidity, or direct sun‐
light.
CDs with copy protection
CDs are often provided with a copy protection
feature by the manufacturer. This can mean
Seite 170
ENTERTAINMENT
CD/multimedia
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
that some CDs cannot be played or can only be
played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision -
may only be used for private purposes. Copying
of this technology is prohibited.
External devices
At a glance
Various external devices can be connected with
the vehicle. Depending on how the device is
connected to the vehicle, it may be possible to
operate it using the MINI joystick.
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
Music interface for smartphones
Bluetooth audio
AUX-IN port
At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Connecting
The AUX-IN port is in the center
console.
Connect the headphone connec‐
tor or line-out connector of the
device to the AUX-IN port.
Ensure that the connector is inserted all the
way into the AUX-IN port.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. If necessary, "External devices"
4. "AUX front"
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs
markedly from the volume of the other audio
sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. If necessary, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
Seite 171
CD/multimedia
ENTERTAINMENT
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired vol‐
ume is set and press the MINI joystick.
USB audio interface/music interface for
smartphones
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They are operated via the onboard monitor.
The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeak‐
ers.
Connectors for external devices
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that
are supported by the USB audio interface.
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, when
equipped with the music interface for
smartphones: Apple iPhone or mobile
phones.
Playback is only possible if no audio device
is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.
Due to the large number of different audio de‐
vices available on the market, it cannot be en‐
sured that every audio device/mobile phone is
operable on the vehicle.
Ask your service center about suitable audio
devices/mobile phones.
Audio files
Standard audio files can be played back:
▷ MP3.
▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
▷ AAC, M4A.
▷ Without the voice activation system: play‐
back lists: M3U
▷ With the voice activation system: playback
lists: M3U, WPL, PLS
Video files
Standard video files can be played back with a
compatible Apple device:
▷ MPEG4
▷ H.264
File system
Standard file systems for USB devices are sup‐
ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.
Connecting
The USB audio interface is in the
center console.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB
audio interface
To connect the iPod, use the special cable
adapter for the Apple iPod. Additional informa‐
tion can be obtained from the service center or
on the Internet: www.mini.com/connectivity.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone with the AUX-
IN port and USB interface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐
ported by the USB audio interface.
Connection of a USB device via the USB
audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro‐
tect the USB audio interface and the USB device
against physical damage.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
Seite 172
ENTERTAINMENT
CD/multimedia
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
After connecting for the first time
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or
type of music, as well as playback lists are
transmitted into the vehicle. This may take
some time, depending on the USB device and
the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 26,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more
than 26,000 tracks are stored, information on
existing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
agement (DRM) cannot be played.
Audio playback
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
The playback starts with the first track.
The CD cover belonging to the track may ap‐
pear on the Control Display after several sec‐
onds.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
▷ Playback lists.
▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
available, composer, album, track.
▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer.
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Search"
5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
"Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
sired entry.
When a letter is entered, the results are
filtered using this letter as the first let‐
ter. If multiple letters are entered, all re‐
sults that contain that sequence are dis‐
played.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain ar‐
tist are to be displayed, call up that artist
only. All of the tracks by that artist are then
displayed.
7. "Play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Seite 173
CD/multimedia
ENTERTAINMENT
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Playback lists
Calling up playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random playback
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
dom order.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or on the CD
player:
Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction.
Video playback
At a glance
Video playback is only possible with a compati‐
ble iPod/iPhone. Connect using a video-capable
adapter cable or, if applicable, a snap-in
adapter.
Playback
The video image on the Control Display is dis‐
played while the vehicle is stationary; in some
countries, the parking brake must be set or P
must be engaged.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Video"
5. Select the desired file.
Select the category in the file directory.
6. Press the MINI joystick.
Playback of the selected video file starts.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
instructions.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in each case.
Audio and video playback from the snap-in
adapter is only possible if no cable is connected
to the AV-IN port.
Seite 174
ENTERTAINMENT
CD/multimedia
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Information on connection
▷ The connected audio device is supplied
with a max. power of 500 mA if supported
by the device. Therefore, do not addition‐
ally connect the device to a socket in the
vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐
promised.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐
charge external devices.
Bluetooth audio
At a glance
▷ Music files on external devices such as au‐
dio devices or mobile phones can be played
back via Bluetooth.
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 194.
▷ Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
speakers.
▷ The volume of the sound output is depend‐
ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the
volume on the device.
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
▷ The device is suitable. Information under
www.mini.com/connectivity.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer
to page 193, and on the device.
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
device, such as for a connection without
confirmation or visibility; refer to the device
operating instructions.
▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐
mum of 16 digits is defined as the Blue‐
tooth passkey. It is only required once for
pairing.
Pairing and connecting
Pairing a device
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio"
4. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
5. Perform additional steps on the device, re‐
fer to the device operating instructions: for
instance, search for or connect the Blue‐
tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the device display.
You are prompted by the onboard monitor
or device to enter the same Bluetooth pass‐
key.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
or
Seite 175
CD/multimedia
ENTERTAINMENT
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Compare the control number on the vehicle
display with the control number on the mo‐
bile phone display. Confirm the control
number on the mobile phone and in the
vehicle.
"OK"
8. Select the desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, for instance
"Audio".
9. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the device is displayed
as connected.
White symbol : the device is active as an au‐
dio source.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 177.
Connecting a specific device
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Bluetooth.
Requirements
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired devi‐
ces.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio"
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
Connecting the device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio"
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
White symbol : the device is active as an au‐
dio source.
Playback
General information
▷ The display of music track information de‐
pends on the device.
▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
onboard monitor.
▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1.
Connect the device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices"
Seite 176
ENTERTAINMENT
CD/multimedia
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec‐
essary.
Playback menu
Depending on the particular device, some of
the functions may not be available.
Symbol Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the sym‐
bol.
Previous music track
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Track search
Music track search is possible depending on the
device.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Search device content"
5. "A-Z search"
6. Select the desired entry or directory.
Playback mode
Depending on the device, different programs
for playing back music files might be available.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Open "Options".
5. Open "Select player".
6. Select the desired channel.
Disconnecting the audio connection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Highlight the desired device.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. "Audio"
7. "OK"
In the case of a mobile phone, only the audio
connection is disconnected. All other connec‐
tions are retained.
Unpairing a device
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio"
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable devices can be found at
www.mini.com/connectivity.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 192.
The device is not supported by the vehicle.
▷ Perform a software update, refer to
page 178, if needed.
Seite 177
CD/multimedia
ENTERTAINMENT
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
The device could not be paired or connected.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and the vehicle match? Enter the same
passkey on the device and via the onboard
monitor.
▷ A multi-character passkey may be needed.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or vehicle? Delete connec‐
tions with other devices if necessary.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining bat‐
tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the
snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one device can be connected
to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
from the vehicle and pair and connect only
one device.
▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the de‐
vice off and on again.
▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
Music cannot be played back.
▷ Start the program for playing back music
data on the device and select a track on the
device if necessary.
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.
Music files can only be played back softly.
▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device.
Videos can only be played back without audio
or with delayed audio.
▷ Check the compatibility of the devices. In‐
formation under www.mini.com/connectiv‐
ity.
Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed
or by other messages on the device.
▷ Switch off the button tones and other signal
tones on the device.
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or
traffic bulletin and is not resumed automati‐
cally.
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is
connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also
connected via the music interface for smart‐
phones in the snap-in adapter.
▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 177, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available,
please contact the hotline or service center.
Software Update
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version.
With a software update, the vehicle can support
new mobile phones or new external device, for
example.
Software updates and related current informa‐
tion is available at www.mini.com/connectivity.
Displaying the current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version"
Updating the software
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
1.
Store the file for the software-update in the
main director of a USB flash drive.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB au‐
dio interface in the center console. An up‐
date via the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment is not possible.
3. "Settings"
4. "Software update"
Seite 178
ENTERTAINMENT
CD/multimedia
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
5. "Update software"
6. "Start update"
7. "OK"
All listed software updates are installed.
Restoring the previous version
The software version prior to the last software
update can be restored.
The previous version can only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. "OK" Double-click.
All listed software updates are removed.
Note
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restored, MINI Connected,
Office functions, and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again.
Seite 179
CD/multimedia
ENTERTAINMENT
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
CONNECT ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Bluetooth hands-free system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
At a glance
The concept
Mobile phones can be connected with the vehi‐
cle via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth® SIG, Inc.
After these devices are paired once, they are
recognized automatically when the ignition is
switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle
and can then be operated via the onboard
monitor, using the buttons on the steering
wheel, and via voice activation.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
Certain functions may need to be enabled by
the mobile phone provider or service provider.
Using the mobile phone while driving
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
in your hand while you are driving; use the
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐
hicle occupants and other road users.◀
Approved mobile phones
Details on which mobile phones are supported
by the hands-free system can be obtained at
www.mini.com/connectivity.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
part number are needed to determine which
mobile phones are supported by the mobile
phone preparation package. The software ver‐
sion of the mobile phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
These approved mobile phones with a certain
software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
phones or software versions.
Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐
nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐
pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Seite 182
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth hands-free system
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Pairing/unpairing the
mobile phone
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to
page 182.
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone.
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be
made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐
nection without confirmation or visibility,
refer to the mobile phone operating in‐
structions.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐
mum of 16 digits was defined as the Blue‐
tooth passkey. It is only required once for
pairing.
▷ Compare the control number on the Control
Display with the control number on the mo‐
bile phone display. Confirm the control
number on the mobile phone and in the
vehicle.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Pairing and connecting a mobile phone
Pairing the mobile phone
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.◀
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions: for instance, search for or con‐
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
6. You are prompted by the onboard monitor
or mobile phone to enter the same Blue‐
tooth passkey. Enter the passkey and con‐
firm.
or
Compare the control number on the vehicle
display with the control number on the mo‐
bile phone display. Confirm the control
number on the mobile phone and in the
vehicle.
Seite 183
Bluetooth hands-free system
COMMUNICATION
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
"OK"
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
9. Move the MINI joystick to the left.
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 184.
Following the initial pairing
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition
is switched on.
▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are
transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
depending on the mobile phone.
▷ Four mobile phones can be paired.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
nected.
Unpairing the mobile phone
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 182.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
nected.
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in
the vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
the onboard monitor.
Seite 184
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth hands-free system
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ A multi-character passkey may be needed.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐
nections with other devices if necessary.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge the mobile phone via the charging
cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected
mobile phone from the vehicle and pair
and connect only one mobile phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts.
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or
low? Do not expose the mobile phone to
extreme environmental conditions.
No phone book entries or only some phone
book entries are displayed, or they are incom‐
plete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e. g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
The phone connection quality is poor.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Place the mobile phone in the area of the
center console.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact Customer Relations or the service center.
Controls
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the
phone book and is transmitted by the network,
the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐
wise, only the phone number is displayed.
If more than one phone number is assigned to
a contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
played.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
or
"Accept"
Seite 185
Bluetooth hands-free system
COMMUNICATION
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
or
1.
"Telephone"
2. "End call"
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
The phone number can also be entered by
voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
You can switch between calls or connect two
calls to a single conference call. These functions
must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
adjusted accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
a call waiting signal is sounded.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish an additional call during an active call.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
Seite 186
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth hands-free system
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it
from a list.
"Return"
The call on hold is resumed.
Switching between two calls, hold call
Active call: highlighted.
Call on hold identified by: "on hold...".
Select the symbol to change to the call on
hold.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐
phone conference call.
1.
Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
DTMF suffix dialing
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess to network services or for controlling devi‐
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐
swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for
this purpose.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number".
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code on the onboard moni‐
tor.
DTMF suffix dialing is not possible during con‐
ference calls.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Seite 187
Bluetooth hands-free system
COMMUNICATION
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Calling a contact
Symbol Meaning
Contact with one stored phone num‐
ber.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone with‐
out reception or network.
For contacts with one stored phone number:
select the required contact. The connection is
being established.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the
phone number. The connection is being estab‐
lished.
Editing a contact
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1.
Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are
displayed that were dialed from the vehicle.
The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis‐
played. The sorting order of the phone num‐
bers depends on the particular mobile phone.
Dialing a number on the onboard
monitor
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and the phone
number if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐
ular mobile phone.
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Received calls
Displaying calls
The list of received calls on the mobile phone is
transmitted to the vehicle, depending on the
particular mobile phone. It is possible that only
Seite 188
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth hands-free system
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
those calls are displayed that were received in
the vehicle.
The 20 telephone calls that were last received
are displayed. The sorting order and display of
the phone numbers depends on the particular
mobile phone.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐
ular mobile phone.
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Hands-free system
General information
Calls that are being made on the hands-free
system can be continued on the mobile phone
and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system
automatically switches to the hands-free sys‐
tem.
If the system does not switch over automati‐
cally, follow the instructions on the mobile
phone display; refer also to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone
display; refer also to the mobile phone operat‐
ing instructions.
Contacts
General information
Contacts can be created and edited.
Contacts can be created and edited and the ad‐
dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav‐
igation.
Seite 189
Bluetooth hands-free system
COMMUNICATION
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
5. Enter the text, refer to page 22.
If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: enter the address. Only addresses
contained in the navigation data in the ve‐
hicle can be entered. This ensures that des‐
tination guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
6. If necessary, "Store"
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at
the top of the contact list.
1.
"Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol Storage location
No sym‐
bol
In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone
Seite 190
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth hands-free system
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. Move the MINI joystick to the left.
5. "Yes"
If a contact from the mobile phone is edited,
the changes are not stored on the mobile
phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehi‐
cle, and only this copy is displayed. Under cer‐
tain circumstances, a contact entry with the
same name is created.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1.
Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts are stored on
the mobile phone, the sorting order of the
names may differ from the selected sorting or‐
der.
Deleting contacts
1.
"My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
Seite 191
Bluetooth hands-free system
COMMUNICATION
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Bluetooth mobile phone
preparation package
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
At a glance
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices such
as audio players can be connected to the vehi‐
cle via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth® SIG, Inc.
After these devices are paired once, they are
recognized automatically when the ignition is
switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle
and can then be operated via the onboard
monitor, using the buttons on the steering
wheel, and via voice activation.
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone
or as an audio source. The telephone functions
are described in the following. Operating the
audio functions, refer to page 175.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
Certain functions may need to be enabled by
the mobile phone provider or service provider.
Using the mobile phone while driving
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
in your hand while you are driving; use the
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐
hicle occupants and other road users.◀
Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter is used to:
▷ Hold the mobile phone.
▷ Recharge the battery.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside
antenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
Approved mobile phones
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
part number are needed to determine which
mobile phones are supported by the mobile
phone preparation package. The software ver‐
sion of the mobile phone may also be required.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
These approved mobile phones with a certain
software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
phones or software versions.
Seite 192
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐
nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐
pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Pairing/unpairing the
mobile phone
General information
The following functions are available:
▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional te‐
lephone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source.
▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 175.
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to
page 192.
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone.
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be
made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐
nection without confirmation or visibility,
refer to the mobile phone operating in‐
structions.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ Compare the control number on the Control
Display with the control number on the mo‐
bile phone display. Confirm the control
number on the mobile phone and in the
vehicle.
▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐
mum of 16 digits was defined as the Blue‐
tooth passkey. It is only required once for
pairing.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Additional functions
Activating/deactivating the additional
functions
Activate the functions before pairing to be able
to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
able mobile phones, refer to page 192, that
support this function.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. Select the desired additional function.
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Office"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
6. "OK"
An additional function cannot be assigned to a
telephone while it is deactivated.
Seite 193
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
COMMUNICATION
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Additional telephone
A mobile phone can be used as an additional
telephone.
The additional telephone can be used to accept
incoming calls, refer to page 197. While a call is
active on the additional telephone, received
calls are displayed on the Control Display.
Office
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐
sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone are
transferred to the vehicle.
Bluetooth audio
A mobile phone can be used as an audio
source.
"Bluetooth® audio"
To use a mobile phone in the vehicle as a tele‐
phone only, deactivate the function and recon‐
nect the mobile phone.
Pairing and connecting a mobile phone
Pairing the mobile phone
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.◀
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions: for instance, search for or con‐
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
6. You are prompted by the onboard monitor
or mobile phone to enter the same Blue‐
tooth passkey.
Enter the passkey and confirm.
or
Compare the control number on the vehicle
display with the control number on the mo‐
bile phone display. Confirm the control
number on the mobile phone and in the
vehicle.
"OK"
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
9. Move the MINI joystick to the left.
Seite 194
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and audio device are displayed as symbols
when paired.
White symbol: the function is active.
Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Symbol Function
Telephone.
Additional telephone.
Audio source.
Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐
hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be con‐
nected with the vehicle at once.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 196.
Following the initial pairing
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition
is switched on.
▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are
transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
depending on the mobile phone.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
nected.
The functions assigned to the mobile phone
before unpairing are assigned to the mobile
phone when it is reconnected. These functions
are deactivated in a mobile phone that is al‐
ready connected.
Device options
Device options can be activated or deactivated
for paired and connected devices.
Configuring the mobile phone
Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐
vated for paired and connected mobile phones.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config‐
ured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. At least one function must be selected.
▷ "Telephone"
Seite 195
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
COMMUNICATION
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a function has already been assigned to an‐
other connected mobile phone, the function is
deactivated in that mobile phone and the mo‐
bile phone is unpaired when the function is as‐
signed to a new mobile phone.
Swapping the telephone and additional
telephone
If a phone and additional phone are connected
to the vehicle, the function can be swapped be‐
tween the two devices.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Using a mobile phone as an audio
source
An audio-capable mobile phone can be used as
an audio source. Activate Bluetooth audio, refer
to page 194.
Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle and
connect it, refer to page 194.
The mobile phone is used as the audio source,
provided that another device has not been con‐
nected as the audio source.
If another device has already been connected
as the audio source:
1.
Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle and
connect it, refer to page 194.
2. "Use for audio"
The mobile phone is connected as an audio
source. The previous audio source is no lon‐
ger connected to the vehicle.
Unpairing a device
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired devices are listed.
3. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 192.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
nected.
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in
the vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
the onboard monitor.
▷ A multi-character passkey may be needed.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐
nections with other devices if necessary.
▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
vate the audio connection.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining bat‐
tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the
snap-in adapter or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected
mobile phone from the vehicle and pair
and connect only one mobile phone.
Seite 196
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
The mobile phone no longer reacts.
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or
low? Do not expose the mobile phone to
extreme environmental conditions.
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the function.
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No phone book entries or only some phone
book entries are displayed, or they are incom‐
plete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e. g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or additional telephone? The mobile
phone must be connected as a telephone.
The phone connection quality is poor.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact Customer Relations or the service center.
Controls
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the telephone and the vol‐
ume of the called party. Depending on the mo‐
bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
justed.
The settings can only be created during a call
and must be adjusted separately for each tele‐
phone. The settings are deleted when the tele‐
phone is unpaired.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or
"Loudspeak."
5. To set: turn the MINI joystick.
6. To save: press the MINI joystick.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the
phone book and is transmitted by the network,
the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐
wise, only the phone number is displayed.
Seite 197
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
COMMUNICATION
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
If more than one phone number is assigned to
a contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
played.
For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
An incoming call to one of the telephones is au‐
tomatically rejected if there is an active call on
the other telephone.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is redirected to the mailbox if the
mailbox was activated
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
or
1.
"Telephone"
2. "End call"
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
The phone number can also be entered by
voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
You can switch between calls or connect two
calls to a single conference call. These functions
must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
adjusted accordingly.
Seite 198
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
If a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
a call waiting signal is sounded.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish an additional call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it
from a list.
"Return"
The call on hold is resumed.
Switching between two calls, hold call
Active call: highlighted.
Call on hold identified by: "on hold...".
Select the symbol to change to the call on
hold.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐
phone conference call.
1.
Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Switching the microphone to mute
When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated:
▷ When a new connection is established.
▷ When switching between call parties.
DTMF suffix dialing
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess to network services or for controlling devi‐
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐
Seite 199
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
COMMUNICATION
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for
this purpose.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number".
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code on the onboard moni‐
tor.
DTMF suffix dialing is not possible during con‐
ference calls.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Calling a contact
Symbol Meaning
Contact with one stored phone num‐
ber.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone with‐
out reception or network.
For contacts with one stored phone number:
select the required contact. The connection is
being established.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the
phone number. The connection is being estab‐
lished.
Editing a contact
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1.
Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are
displayed that were dialed from the vehicle.
The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis‐
played. The sorting order of the phone num‐
bers depends on the particular mobile phone.
Seite 200
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Dialing a number on the onboard
monitor
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and the phone
number if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐
ular mobile phone.
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Received calls
Displaying calls
The list of received calls on the mobile phone is
transmitted to the vehicle, depending on the
particular mobile phone. It is possible that only
those calls are displayed that were received in
the vehicle.
The 20 telephone calls that were last received
are displayed. The sorting order and display of
the phone numbers depends on the particular
mobile phone.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐
ular mobile phone.
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Seite 201
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
COMMUNICATION
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Snap-in adapter
General information
More information on compatible snap-in
adapters that support the functions of the mo‐
bile phone is available at the service center.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Installation position
In the center armrest.
Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter
1.
Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the
cover, arrow 2.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
To remove:
To remove the snap-in adapter, press the but‐
ton.
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobile
phone up toward the electrical contacts, ar‐
row 1, and press it down until it engages,
arrow 2.
The battery is charged beginning with the radio
ready state of the vehicle.
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the mo‐
bile phone, arrow 2.
Seite 202
COMMUNICATION
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Office
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
At a glance
General information
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐
sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can
be displayed on the Control Display if the mo‐
bile phone provides compatible support of
these functions and the necessary Bluetooth
standards.
Information about which mobile phones and
functions are available can be found at
www.mini.com/connectivity.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary.
The mobile phone has read-access only.
Do not use Office while driving
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless
traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.
▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 78, are correctly set on the Control
Display and on the mobile phone, for in‐
stance to correctly display appointments.
Updating
Data are updated every time the mobile phone
is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐
tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be up‐
dated separately.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Mobile phone data are transmitted again to
the vehicle.
Office information
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as the upcoming appointments
are displayed.
1.
"Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Seite 203
Office
COMMUNICATION
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Contacts
At a glance
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone.
The addresses can be adopted as destinations
for navigation and the phone numbers can be
dialed.
Displaying contacts
General information
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Symbol Storage location
No sym‐
bol
In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone.
Dialing a phone number
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the en‐
try is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are
used, the address may need to be matched
to the navigation data contained in the ve‐
hicle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Seite 204
COMMUNICATION
Office
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of
it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
General information
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐
net address.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "New contact"
5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type.
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: enter the address. Only addresses
contained in the navigation data in the ve‐
hicle can be entered. This ensures that des‐
tination guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
If necessary, "Accept address"
9. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types
Various contact types can be assigned to phone
numbers and addresses.
Symbol Meaning
Home phone number.
Business phone number.
Mobile phone number.
Other phone number.
Home address.
Business address.
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at
the top of the contact list.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. "Home"
4. Create a contact.
5. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored on
the mobile phone, the sorting order of the
Seite 205
Office
COMMUNICATION
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
names may differ from the selected sorting or‐
der.
Show contact pictures
Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in
the vehicle when the mobile phone is con‐
nected to the vehicle. The number of transmit‐
ted pictures depends on the mobile phone. The
mobile phone must support this function.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. "Show images"
Display of all contact pictures is activated or de‐
activated.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
Messages
General information
Whether or not text messages and e-mails from
the mobile phone are displayed depends on
whether transmission from the mobile phone
to the vehicle is supported. Text messages and
e-mails may not be supported by the service
provider, or the function may need to be ena‐
bled separately. After the mobile phone is first
paired, transmission may take several minutes.
Messages are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary. Messages from the ad‐
ditional telephone are not transmitted.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
A symbol identifies the type of message.
Symbol Message type
Text messages.
E-mail from mobile phone.
Filtering the message list
The message list can be filtered if more than
one type of message exists.
1.
"Filter:"
2. Select the type of message.
▷ "All"
All messages are displayed.
▷ "Text message"
Only text messages from the mobile
phone are displayed.
▷ "E-mail"
Only e-mails from the mobile phone
are displayed.
Text messages
Calling the sender of a text message
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Select the symbol.
Saving the sender in the contacts
1.
Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Seite 206
COMMUNICATION
Office
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or
selected, refer to page 209.
Reading the text message out loud
Read the text message out loud, refer to
page 209.
E-mail
Displaying e-mails
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired e-mail.
Displaying e-mail contacts
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are
transmitted by the mobile phone, this informa‐
tion is displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the
contacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or
selected, refer to page 209.
Deactivating the full display
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e-
mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may
result in charges.
1.
"Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of the e-mail from the mobile
phone is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading the e-mail out loud
Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 209.
Calendar
Display the calendar
Appointments during the last 20 days and the
next 50 days can be displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Calendar"
The appointments on the current day are
displayed.
Selecting the calendar day
1.
Select the date.
2. Select the desired day or date.
▷ "Next day"
▷ "Date:"
▷ "Previous day"
▷ "Today"
Display the appointment
1.
Select the desired appointment.
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
sary:
▷ Turn the MINI joystick.
▷ Select the symbol.
Seite 207
Office
COMMUNICATION
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or
selected, refer to page 209.
Reading the appointment out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to
page 209.
Tasks
Displaying the task list
Display tasks that are due within the next
90 days.
1.
"Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting the task list
1.
Select the header in the task list.
2. Select the sorting criterion:
▷ "Priority (!)"
▷ "Subject"
▷ "Due date"
Displaying the task
1.
Select the desired task.
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
▷ Turn the MINI joystick.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or
selected, refer to page 209.
Reading the task out loud
Read the task out loud, refer to page 209.
Notes
Displaying notes
1.
"Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying the note
1.
Select the desired note.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary:
▷ Turn the MINI joystick.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or
selected, refer to page 209.
Reading the note out loud
Read the note out loud, refer to page 209.
Seite 208
COMMUNICATION
Office
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a
task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The corresponding appointment or the task are
displayed.
Using contact data
At a glance
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or
selected.
Displaying contact or selecting phone
number
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone
number:
▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐
tails.
▷ Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
Storing contact data
1. "Use contact data"
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
dress.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading out loud
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
1.
Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
The following options are available during
reading:
▷ "Pause"
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
reading.
▷ "Back to beginning"
Start reading the message again from the
beginning.
▷ Select the symbol.
Go back one paragraph.
▷ Select the symbol.
Skip a paragraph.
▷ To end reading, move the MINI joystick to
the left.
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 192.
Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐
played.
Seite 209
Office
COMMUNICATION
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the
missing function or is not connected cor‐
rectly.
▷ The Office function is deactivated.
▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
tional phone.
▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or are
more than 50 days in the future.
▷ The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.
▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐
pointments, task notes, and messages in
the mobile phone, not all are displayed in
the vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile
phone are displayed at the right time?
▷ The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly
set on the Control Display and mobile
phone.
Entries are not displayed in full length.
▷ Text were already transmitted from the
mobile phone in a shortened form.
▷ Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle may take several minutes.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
▷ Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
the vehicle.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available,
please contact the hotline or service center.
Seite 210
COMMUNICATION
Office
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
MINI Connected
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
At a glance
The concept
Certain software applications of a suitable mo‐
bile phone can be integrated in the vehicle.
These software applications are displayed on
the Control Display.
They are operated via the onboard monitor.
The scope of the software applications may
vary by country.
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
▷ The mobile phone operating system sup‐
ports the software applications of MINI
Connected.
▷ Software applications are installed on the
mobile phone and ready to use.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Any additionally incurred costs are not a
part of MINI Connected.
Information about suitable mobile phones,
available software applications, and their instal‐
lation can be obtained at www.mini.com/
connectivity or from the service center.
Create the entries.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐
pants and other road users may be put in dan‐
ger because of the distraction from driving.
For reasons of safety, some software applica‐
tions are usable only while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.◀
Software applications
Use only software applications approved
by the manufacturer of your MINI; otherwise,
malfunctions may occur.◀
Connecting the mobile
phone
Connection via the USB audio interface
The USB audio interface is in the
center console.
Connect the mobile phone to the
USB interface and the AV-IN port
using a special adapter cable
available from the service center.
To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating in‐
structions: for instance, selecting and activating
software applications.
Connection via the snap-in adapter
The mobile phone can also be connected, refer
to page 202, via the snap-in adapter.
Operating MINI Connected
After the mobile phone is successfully con‐
nected with the vehicle and MINI Connected is
started, the applications are displayed on the
Seite 211
MINI Connected
COMMUNICATION
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Control Display and can be operated using the
MINI joystick.
The volume can be set using the following con‐
trols:
▷ Buttons on the steering
wheel or
▷ Volume button on the radio, refer to
page 160.
1. Connect the mobile phone via the snap-in
adapter or via the USB audio interface.
2.
Press the button. The main menu is
opened.
3. "MINI Connected"
4. Select the desired software application.
Notes
▷ The scope of MINI Connected that can be
displayed on the Control Display depends
on the range of software applications in‐
stalled on the mobile phone.
▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐
plications from the mobile phone to the ve‐
hicle can last some time. Some software
applications depend on the speed of the
available Internet connection of the mobile
phone.
▷ Some mobile phones cannot simultane‐
ously use MINI Connected and the Blue‐
tooth hands-free system.
If necessary, restart the software applica‐
tion on the mobile phone after a phone
conversation.
▷ Audio and video playback from the snap-in
adapter is only possible if no cable is con‐
nected to the AV-IN port.
PlugIn
The concept
Selected functions of a compatible Apple de‐
vice can be displayed on the Control Display via
a video connection. They are operated using
the MINI joystick and the button on the
MINI joystick.
Functional requirement
▷ Suitable iPhone or iPod: as of iPhone 3GS or
iPod with software version iOS 4.1 and
higher.
▷ The MINI Connected app is not required.
Information on compatible adapters and inter‐
faces can be obtained from the service center.
Activating
1.
Connect the Apple device.
Operation takes place via the MINI joystick
with its buttons.
2. "MINI Connected"
3. "PlugIn"
4. Select the connection type: "Activate via
AUX connection" or"Activate via Snap-In
adapter"
5. "Activate PlugIn"
6. Use the MINI joystick to navigate among
the displayed functions and select, for ex‐
ample, a desired category or track.
Controls
The PlugIn is activated to display the graphic
output of the connected device on the Control
Seite 212
COMMUNICATION
MINI Connected
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Display. This changes the operating functions of
the MINI joystick and the MINI buttons until the
PlugIn is deactivated again.
The operation of the PlugIn depends on the iOS
version in use, e.g., iOS 4.1.
Home button
Press the button to select the following
functions:
▷ Press 1x: opens the display menu bar.
▷ Press 2x: opens the main menu.
▷ Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the
left 1x: opens the MINI Connected menu.
▷ Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the
left 2x: opens the main menu.
Toggle button
Press the button to select the following
functions.
▷ Press 1x: return to the next higher menu
level of the iPhones/iPods.
MINI joystick
▷ Press: selection/play/pause.
▷ Turn: navigate through the lists.
▷ Move to the left: jump to the beginning of
the current music track or to the previous
music track in the playback list.
▷ Move the left and hold: reverse.
▷ Move to the right: jump to the next music
track in the playback list.
▷ Move to the right and hold: fast forward.
Deactivating
There are several methods of deactivating the
PlugIn and returning to the MINI operating
level.
Via the home button
▷ Press 1x: returns to activating the PlugIn.
▷ Press 2x: opens the main menu.
▷ Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the
left 1x: opens the MINI Connected menu.
▷ Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the
left 2x. Opens the main menu.
Via the audio source button
Press 1x: changes to the audio source
selected last.
Seite 213
MINI Connected
COMMUNICATION
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
MOVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Refuel promptly
At the latest, refuel at a range below
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Notes
Switch off the engine before refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu‐
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.◀
Observe when handling fuel
▷ Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations
when handling fuel.
▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers in
your vehicle. They can develop a leak and
cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Open fuel filler flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until
you clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap
can be released manually:
Seite 216
MOBILITY
Refueling
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
1. Remove the cover of the left cargo area
side wall.
2. Pull the green knob with the gas pump
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
MINI Convertible:
1.
Remove the cover of the left cargo area
side wall.
2. Pull the green knob with the gas pump
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following
when refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature pump shutoff.
▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,
escaping fuel may harm the environment or
damage the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Follow the safety instructions provided at
gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of
personal injury and property damage.◀
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 13.2 US gal/50 liters, including a re‐
serve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
Seite 217
Refueling
MOBILITY
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Fuel
Fuel recommendation
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel
pump as containing metals.
Only refuel with lead-free gasoline with‐
out metal additives
Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline
with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron;
otherwise, the catalytic converter and other
components will be permanently damaged.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.
The ethanol should fulfill the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: always adhere to the currently applicable
standard.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as
this would damage the engine and fuel supply
system.◀
The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you
can refuel with different recommended fuel
grades.
Recommended fuel grade
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends:
▷ AKI 91.
▷ John Cooper Works AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends
AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not fill up with fuel below the speci‐
fied minimum quality; otherwise, the engine
may not run properly.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting
and stalling, especially under certain environ‐
mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐
perature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
Seite 218
MOBILITY
Fuel
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Seite 219
Fuel
MOBILITY
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐
sure.
Checking the pressure
Tires naturally lose pressure uniformly across all
four tires.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stabil‐
ity, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of
an accident.
Do not drive with depressurized or flat tires, ex‐
cept for run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously
impair your vehicle's handling and braking re‐
sponse. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead
to a loss of control over the vehicle.◀
Tires warm up during driving and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases as the temperature
rises. The tire inflation pressure specifications
apply to cold tires or tires at ambient tempera‐
ture.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle
has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the
tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is
higher.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 95
or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 93.
Checking the inflation pressure of the
compact wheel
To check the inflation pressure, there is a valve
extension behind the bumper.
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct infla‐
tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at am‐
bient temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes
approved and tire brands recommended by the
manufacturer of the MINI; a list of these is
available from the service center.
For correct identification of the right tire infla‐
tion pressures, observe the following:
Seite 220
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle
▷ Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/
160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
door is open.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed
The permissible maximum speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h. Do
not exceed this speed or else there is a risk of
tire damage and accidents.◀
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
Adjust the tire inflation pressures
To drive at maximum speeds in excess of
100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐
spective tire inflation pressures listed on the
following pages in the column for traveling
speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or
160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents could occur.◀
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could
occur.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Cooper Coupe
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
175/65 R 15 84 T M+S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S A/S Std
195/55 R 16 87 H RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
2.4/35 2.4/35
Seite 221
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC 2.6/38 2.6/38
Compact wheel: T 115/70 R 15 90 M Traveling speed up to 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 267.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Cooper S Coupe
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/55 R 16 87 V RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
2.6/38 2.6/38
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
2.8/41 2.8/41
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 267.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI John Cooper Works Coupe
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 W RSC
2.8/41 2.7/39
Seite 222
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC 3.0/44 2.9/42
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 267.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Cooper Roadster
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
175/65 R 15 84 T M+S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S A/S Std
195/55 R 16 87 H RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
2.4/35 2.4/35
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC 2.6/38 2.6/38
Compact wheel: T 115/70 R 15 90 M Traveling speed up to 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 268.
Seite 223
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Cooper S Roadster
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/55 R 16 87 V RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
2.6/38 2.6/38
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
2.8/41 2.8/41
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 268.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI John Cooper Works Roadster
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 84 W RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
2.8/41 2.7/39
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC 3.0/44 2.9/42
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 268.
Seite 224
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Cooper Convertible
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds above
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
175/65 R 15 84 T M+S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S A/S Std
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 268.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Cooper S Convertible
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds above
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/55 R 16 87 V RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38
Seite 225
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
2.7/39 2.7/39 2.9/42 2.9/42
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 268.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI John Cooper Works Convertible
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds above
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 84 W RSC
2.7/39 2.7/39 2.9/42 2.9/42
205/40 R 18 86 W XLRSC 2.9/42 2.9/42 3.1/45 3.1/45
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 268.
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the
tire makes it easier to identify and choose the
right tires.
Tire size
Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V
225: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
91: load rating, not for ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
DOT xxxx xxx 2214
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
2214: tire age
Seite 226
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
Conform to Federal Safety Requirements
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.◀
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving hab‐
its, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under control‐
led conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐
droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi‐
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
page 230.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than
summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
The tread depth should not be less than
0.12 in/3 mm, although European legislation,
Seite 227
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
for example, requires a minimum tread depth
of only 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths less
than 0.12 in/3 mm, there is a great danger of
hydroplaning even in low water depths and at
raised speeds.
Winter tires
The suitability of winter tires for winter driving
is reduced noticeably when their tread depth
becomes less than 0.16 in/4 mm.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators in the tread base are distrib‐
uted around the circumference of the tire and
are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator. When the tire tread has been
worn down to the wear indicators, a tread has
reached a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-
profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,
road damage and similar situations.
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; other‐
wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can present a life-
threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and
other road users.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Tire age
Recommendation
For several reasons, among other things be‐
cause of beginning brittleness, the manufac‐
turer of your MINI recommends mounting new
tires at the latest after six years, regardless of
the actual wear.
Manufacture date
The date of manufacture of the tires is specified
in the tire label:
Seite 228
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
DOT … 0315: the tire was manufactured in the
3rd week of 2015.
Changing wheels and
tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the right wheel and tire combi‐
nation and rim version for your vehicle can be
obtained from the service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as ABS
or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
ate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle if they are mounted.◀
Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire
Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the
Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect
a flat tire, refer to page 94. Your service center
will be glad to advise you.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
are indicated by the clearly visible marking on
the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Seite 229
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire
specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐
cidents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-
flat tires for your own safety. Also, a compact
wheel is not available in case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns occur on the front and
rear axles, depending on the individual condi‐
tions of use.
To ensure even wear on the tires, the wheels
can be rotated between the axles. Your service
center will be glad to advise you.
After changing the tires, check the tire inflation
pressure and correct it if necessary.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tires are tires that support themselves
for a limited period of time, and they may also
come with special rims. The sidewall reinforce‐
ment ensures that the tire can continue to be
used to a limited extent if it has lost pressure
and even if it has become completely depres‐
surized.
For continued driving in the event of a flat tire,
refer to page 93.
Correcting a flat tire
Safety measures in case of a breakdown
▷ Park the vehicle as far as possible
from passing traffic and on solid
ground. Switch on the hazard warn‐
ing system.
▷ Let the steering wheel lock engage with the
wheels in the straight-ahead position, set
the parking brake, and engage first gear or
reverse, or engage selector lever position P.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
Seite 230
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ If a warning triangle or portable hazard
warning lamp is required, set it up on the
roadside at an appropriate distance from
the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all
safety guidelines and regulations.◀
The procedure to correct a flat tire depends on
the equipment in the vehicle:
▷ Run-flat tires, refer to page 230.
▷ MINI Mobility System, refer to page 231.
▷ Wheel change with a compact wheel, refer
to page 248.
MINI Mobility System
Notes
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant bottle.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if tire damage is greater than approx.
1/8 in/4 mm in size.
▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tire
cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.
Sealant and compressor
1 Sealant bottle and speed limit sticker
2 Filling hose
Note the use-by date on the sealant bottle.
3 Holder for the sealant bottle
4 Compressor
5 Connector and cable for the lighter socket/
socket in passenger compartment 115.
6 Connection hose for connecting the com‐
pressor and sealant bottle or the compres‐
sor and wheel
7 On/off switch
8 Pressure gauge for displaying the tire infla‐
tion pressure
9 Release button for reducing the tire infla‐
tion pressure
The connector, cable, and connecting hose are
stowed in the compressor housing.
Using the Mobility System
To repair a flat tire with the Mobility System,
proceed as follows:
▷ Filling the tire with sealant
▷ Distributing the sealant
▷ Correcting the tire inflation pressure
Filling the tire with sealant
Adhere to the specified sequence
Adhere to the specified sequence of the
steps; otherwise, sealant may escape under
high pressure.◀
1.
Shake the sealant bottle.
2. Pull the connection hose 6 fully out of the
compressor housing and screw it onto the
sealant bottle connection. Ensure that the
connection hose is not kinked.
Seite 231
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Insert the sealant bottle into the compres‐
sor housing in a vertical position.
4. Unscrew the dust cap off of the valve of the
defective wheel and screw the filling hose 2
of the sealant bottle onto the valve.
5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off.
6. Insert connector 5 into the lighter socket/
socket in the passenger compartment, refer
to page 115.
7. When the engine is running:
Switch on the compressor and let it run for
approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill sealant into
the tire and achieve a tire inflation pressure
of approx. 1.8 bar/26 psi.
While sealant is being filled, the inflation
pressure may intermittently rise to approx.
5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the com‐
pressor in this phase.
8. Switch off the compressor.
Do not allow the compressor to run too
long
Do not allow the compressor to run longer than
10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat
and may be damaged.◀
If an air pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is not
reached:
1.
Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel
and drive forward and back approx.
33 ft/10 m to evenly distribute the sealant
in the tire.
2. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is still
not reached, the tire is too heavily damaged.
Contact the nearest service center.
Stowing the Mobility System
1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 of the sealant
bottle from the wheel.
2. Unscrew the compressor connection hose 6
from the sealant bottle.
3. Connect the filling hose 2 of the sealant
bottle with the free connector on the seal‐
ant bottle.
This prevents left-over sealant from escap‐
ing from the bottle.
4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitable
material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Drive approx. 3.1 miles/5 km to evenly distrib‐
ute the sealant.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If
possible, do not drop below a speed of
10 mph/20 km/h.
Correcting the tire inflation pressure
1.
After driving approx. 3.1 miles/5 km, or
about 10 minutes, stop in a suitable loca‐
tion.
2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve.
3. Insert the connector 5 into the power
socket in the passenger compartment.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
1.8 bar/26 psi. When the engine is running:
▷ To increase the inflation pressure:
switch on the compressor. To check the
currently set inflation pressure, switch
off the compressor.
▷ To reduce the inflation pressure: press
the release button 9.
Seite 232
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Do not allow the compressor to run too
long
Do not allow the compressor to run longer than
10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat
and may be damaged.◀
If the inflation pressure is not maintained, take
the vehicle on another drive, distributing the
sealant, refer to page 232. Then repeat steps
1 to 4 once.
If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is still
not reached, the tire is too heavily damaged.
Contact the nearest service center.
Continuing the trip
Note the maximum speed
Do not exceed the maximum speed of
50 mph/80 km/h; otherwise, accidents can oc‐
cur.◀
Replace the defective tire as soon as possible
and have the wheel balanced.
Have the Mobility System refilled.
Snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by MINI, classified as safe for use, and
recommended. Consult your service center for
more information.
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
with tires of the following size:
▷ 175/65 R 15 M+S
▷ 175/60 R 16 M+S
John Cooper Works:
▷ 185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph or 50 km/h when using snow chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow
chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument
might issue an incorrect reading.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor if
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the in‐
strument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, it may be use‐
ful to temporarily deactivate DSC or activate
DTC, refer to page 100.
Seite 233
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number
2 Battery, under the cover 251
3 Dip stick for engine oil 236
4 Engine oil filler neck 236
5 Coolant expansion tank 238
6 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlight
and window washer system 69
7 Engine compartment fuse box 252
Seite 234
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Hood
Notes
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are resting against the wind‐
shield before you open the engine compart‐
ment. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down; otherwise, injuries
may result.◀
Unlocking and opening the hood
1.
Pull the lever.
2. Lift the hood all the way.
3. Press the release handle and open the
hood.
Danger of injury when the hood is open
There is a danger of injury from protrud‐
ing parts when the hood is open.◀
Closing the hood
Close the hood from a height of ap‐
prox. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be
clearly heard to engage.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
mediately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 235
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Engine oil
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Engine oil consumption depends on the driving
style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty
driving style, for example, results in considera‐
bly higher engine oil consumption.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Checking the oil level with a dip stick
1.
Park the vehicle on level ground when the
engine is at operating temperature, i.e., af‐
ter driving continuously for at least
6 2 miles/10 km.
2. Switch the engine off.
3. After approx. 5 minutes, pull out the dip
stick and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth,
paper towel, etc.
4. Carefully insert the dip stick all the way into
the measuring tube and pull it out again.
The oil level must be between the two
marks on the dip stick.
The oil quantity between the two marks on the
dip stick equals approx. 1 US quart/1 liter.
Do not exceed the high mark.
Do not exceed the high mark of the dip
stick. Overfilling oil damages the engine.◀
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter
of oil only after the corresponding message ap‐
pears on the Control Display or, in diesel en‐
gines, after the oil level is just above the low
mark of the dip stick, refer to page 236.
Add oil promptly
Add oil within the next 30 miles/50 km;
otherwise, engine damage could result.◀
Seite 236
MOBILITY
Engine oil
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Notes
No oil additives
Do not use oil additives as these may
cause engine damage.◀
Viscosity classes of engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE viscos‐
ity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, or
malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Further information on approved oil types can
be obtained from the service center.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/1 liter of an oil with the following
specification can be used:
Gasoline engine
API SM or a higher quality standard
Engine oil change
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
having the engine oil changed by a service cen‐
ter.
Seite 237
Engine oil
MOBILITY
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Coolant
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your MINI vehicle. Ask your service
center for suitable additives.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant and therefore the engine over‐
heat, a warning lamp lights up. A message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Coolant level
Checking
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
wise slightly to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape; then continue turning
to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the markings. The markings are located on
the side of the coolant reservoir.
Refilling
1.
Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
wise slightly to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. If the coolant level is low, slowly add cool‐
ant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Twist the cap closed.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the appropriate environ‐
mental protection regulations when dis‐
posing of coolant additives.
Seite 238
MOBILITY
Coolant
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
MINI maintenance system
The MINI maintenance system provides infor‐
mation on required maintenance measures and
thus provides support in maintaining road
safety and the operational reliability of the ve‐
hicle.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the various driving conditions of your
MINI. Based on this, Condition Based Service
determines the current and future mainte‐
nance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Detailed information on service requirements
can be displayed on the Control Display, refer
to page 80.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and sug‐
gest the right array of service procedures for
your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service spe‐
cialist the remote control that you used most
recently.
Setting the correct date
Make sure the date is set correctly; other‐
wise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based
Service is not ensured.◀
Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for
US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Book‐
let for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require‐
ments.
Maintenance and repair should be performed
by your service center. Make sure to have regu‐
lar maintenance procedures recorded in the ve‐
hicle's Service and Warranty Information Book‐
let for US models, and in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
These entries are proof of regular maintenance.
Seite 239
Maintenance
MOBILITY
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis may
only be used by the service center, by work‐
shops that operate according to the specifica‐
tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro‐
priately trained personnel, and by other
authorized persons. Otherwise, its use may
lead to vehicle malfunctions.◀
Primary components in the vehicle emissions
can be checked via the OBD socket using a de‐
vice.
Emissions
The warning lamps light up. The vehicle
is producing higher emissions. You can
continue your journey, but moderate
your speed and exercise due caution. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps
flashes or lights up continuously. This indicates
that there is excessive misfiring or a malfunc‐
tion in the engine. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed and drive to the next service cen‐
ter promptly. Serious engine misfiring within a
brief period can seriously damage emission
control components, in particular the catalytic
converter. In addition, the mechanical engine
components may become damaged.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight‐
ened, the OBD system may conclude
that fuel vapor is escaping; this will cause a dis‐
play to light up. If the filler cap is then tight‐
ened, the display should go out in a few days.
Seite 240
MOBILITY
Maintenance
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Tool kit
Depending on the vehicle equipment, your ve‐
hicle contains a special onboard vehicle tool kit
that is stowed under the flat loading floor in the
cargo area.
With Mobility System
1 Sealant bottle
2 Hex key
3 Pulling hook
4 Vehicle jack
5 Lug bolts wrench
6 Screwdriver/cross-head, tow fitting
7 Compressor
With run-flat tires or compact wheel
The onboard vehicle tool kit contains a pouch
holding a plastic bag in which you can stow the
defective wheel.
1 Folding wheel chock and cover for the de‐
fective wheel
2 Pulling hook
3 Lug bolts wrench
4 Vehicle jack
5 Special wrench for releasing the compact
wheel
6 Screwdriver/cross-head
7 Tow fitting
8 Lifting handle
Wiper blade replacement
General information
Do not fold down the wipers without
wiper blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades
have not been installed; this may damage the
windshield.◀
Seite 241
Replacing components
MOBILITY
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: replacing
the wiper blades
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.
2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch
mechanism toward the front.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixation
until it engages audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Risk of damage
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto
the window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
MINI Convertible: replacing the wiper
blades
1.
Fold up and hold the wiper arm.
2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
fold toward the wiper blade, arrows 2.
3. While squeezing the locking spring, pull the
wiper blade off of the wiper arm, arrow 3.
4. Slide the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it engages audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Risk of damage
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto
the window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment
Notes
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety. Therefore, exercise cau‐
tion when handling lights and bulbs.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at the service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system,
you should always switch off the lights affected
to prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Seite 242
MOBILITY
Replacing components
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Caring for the headlights, refer to page 259.
For bulb replacement that is not described
here, please contact the service center or a
workshop that works according to the repair
procedures of the manufacturer with corre‐
spondingly trained personnel.
For checking and adjusting headlight aim,
please contact your MINI dealer.
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
In some equipment, the light source is provided
by light-emitting diodes behind a cover.
These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐
ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐
tional lasers, are designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlights in cool or humid weather. When the
light is switched on, the condensation evapo‐
rates after a short time. The headlights do not
need to be changed.
If the condensation in the headlights does not
evaporate after trips with the lights switched
on, and the amount of moisture in the head‐
lights increases, for example if water droplets
form, have them checked by your service cen‐
ter.
Bi-xenon headlights
These bulbs have a very long life and the likeli‐
hood of failure is very low, provided that they
are not switched on and off excessively. If a
bulb should nevertheless fail, you can continue
driving cautiously with the front fog lights, pro‐
vided this is permitted by local laws.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is
carried out improperly.◀
Front lights, bulb replacement
At a glance
Headlights
1 Low beams/high-beams
2 Turn signal
Lower front lights
1 Parking lights
2 Daytime running lights or fog lights
Seite 243
Replacing components
MOBILITY
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Lower LED front lights
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights
2 Fog lights
Halogen low beams and high-beams
H13 bulb, 60/55 watt
Wear protective goggles and gloves
Halogen bulbs are pressurized. Therefore,
wear protective goggles and gloves. Otherwise,
there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is acci‐
dentally damaged during replacement.◀
Attach the cover carefully
When attaching the cover, proceed care‐
fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam‐
age to the headlamp system.◀
Access to the bulbs through the engine
compartment
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 242.
Low beam/high-beam bulbs can be changed
from the engine compartment.
To remove the cover:
1. Press the tab.
2. Fold away the cover and take it out of the
holder.
Proceed in reverse order to attach the cover.
Attach the cover carefully
When attaching the cover, proceed care‐
fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam‐
age to the headlamp system.◀
Replacing the bulb
1.
Turn the bulb counterclockwise, arrow 1,
and remove it, arrow 2.
2. Press the release, arrow 1, and pull off the
connector, arrow 2.
Seite 244
MOBILITY
Replacing components
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
LED parking lights/LED fog lights/LED
daytime running lights
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 242.
Lights are implemented using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Turn signals/parking lights/roadside
parking lights/fog lights/and daytime
running lights
Access to the bulbs via the wheel housing
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 242.
1 Turn signal
2 Parking lights/roadside parking lights/fog
lights/and daytime running lights
Replacing the turn signal bulb
21-watt bulb, P 21 W, or PY 21 W
1.
Turn the wheel.
2. Remove cover 1.
To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Remove the inside cover. To do this, turn
the cover counterclockwise.
4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re‐
move it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the covers
in reverse order.
Replacing the parking light bulb and
roadside parking light bulb
5-watt bulb, W 5 W
1.
Turn the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.
Seite 245
Replacing components
MOBILITY
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Turn the upper bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
Replacing the front fog light bulb
H8 bulb, 35 watt
1.
Turn the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.
4. Turn the lower bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
Replacing the daytime running light bulb
Bulb PSX24W
1.
Turn the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.
4. Squeeze the lower bulb at both tabs and
pull out.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
Lateral turn signals
5-watt bulb, W 5 W
1.
Push the light forward with the air grille and
remove it.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
remove it.
3. Pull out the bulb and replace it.
4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 242.
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, PY 21 W
Brake light: 21-watt/5-watt bulb, W 5 W
Remaining lights: 21-watt bulb, P 21 W
Seite 246
MOBILITY
Replacing components
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
1 Turn signal
2 Tail light LED
3 Brake light
Replacing
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster
1.
Remove the cover of the cargo area side
wall.
2. Turn the corresponding bulb counterclock‐
wise, arrows 1, and remove.
Another bulb is located behind the cargo
area side wall, arrow 2.
3. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
MINI Convertible
1. Remove the cover of the cargo area side
wall.
Move the convertible top to the top posi‐
tion, refer to page 117, and take off the
cover of the cargo area side wall.
2. Turn the corresponding bulb counterclock‐
wise, arrows 1, and remove.
Another bulb is located behind the cargo
area side wall, arrow 2.
3. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
Rear fog light/backup light
16-watt bulbs, W 16W
The lights are accessed via the rear side or the
underside of the bumper.
Seite 247
Replacing components
MOBILITY
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
1. Squeeze the clips, arrows, and remove the
bulb holder.
2. Pull off the bulb and replace it.
3. Insert the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audi‐
bly clicks into place.
John Cooper Works: aerodynamic bumper
The lights are accessed via the rear side or the
underside of the bumper.
1.
Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun‐
terclockwise, arrow.
2. Pull off the bulb and replace it.
3. Insert the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order.
License plate lights
5-watt bulb, C 5 W
Replacing
1. Push the light to the left in the catch of the
light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐
row 1.
2. Take out the light, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Insert the light.
Center brake light
This light uses LED technology for operation.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Changing wheels
Notes
Wheel change for run-flat tires:
▷ Prepare for the wheel change, refer to
page 250.
▷ Jack up the vehicle, refer to page 250.
▷ Tighten the lug bolts, refer to page 251.
Compact wheel
Wheel change with a compact wheel:
▷ Remove the compact wheel, refer to
page 249.
▷ Prepare for the wheel change, refer to
page 250.
▷ Jack up the vehicle, refer to page 250.
▷ Mount the compact wheel, refer to
page 250.
Seite 248
MOBILITY
Replacing components
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ Tighten the lug bolts, refer to page 251.
▷ Drive with the compact wheel, refer to
page 249.
Removing the compact wheel
The screw fitting of the compact wheel is lo‐
cated in the cargo area under the floor mat, on
the floor of the storage compartment holding
the wheel change set.
1. Release the screw fitting with the special
wrench.
2. Take out the cover.
3. Screw the lifting handle from the onboard
vehicle tool kit onto the thread.
4. Raise the lifting handle slightly.
5. Squeeze the locking spring.
6. Lower the compact wheel with the lifting
handle.
7. Lower the compact wheel with the lifting
handle.
8. Unscrew the lifting handle again.
9. Pull the compact wheel out from under the
vehicle toward the back.
10. Lay the compact wheel down with the
valve facing up.
11. Unscrew the valve extension from the valve
of the compact wheel.
12. Unscrew the dust cap from the extension
and attach it to the valve of the compact
wheel.
The defective wheel cannot be stowed in the
compact wheel holder because it has a differ‐
ent size.
Driving with compact wheel
Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Drive conservatively and do not exceed a speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h. Otherwise, changes in the
Seite 249
Replacing components
MOBILITY
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
driving characteristics could result, for example
reduced track stability on braking, extended
braking distance, and altered self-steering
characteristics in the limit range. In conjunction
with winter tires, these characteristics are more
pronounced.◀
Only mount one compact wheel
Only one compact wheel may be
mounted. Restore the wheels and tires to their
original size as quickly as possible. Failure to do
so is a safety risk.◀
Check the tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct it if necessary. Replace
the defective tire as soon as possible and have
the new wheel balanced.
Preparing wheel change
Observe the safety precautions regarding flat
tires, refer to page 230.
Additional safety precautions in the event
of a wheel change
Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery.
The vehicle or the jack could slip to the side if
you attempt to raise the vehicle on a soft or
slippery surface, snow, ice, tiles, etc. Do not use
a wooden block or similar object as a support
base for the jack, as this would prevent it from
extending to its full support height and reduce
its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it
is supported by the jack.◀
1.
Place the folding wheel chock behind the
front wheel of the other vehicle side; if the
vehicle is on an incline, place it in front of
this wheel. If the vehicle is parked on a
steep incline, additionally secure the vehi‐
cle against rolling.
2. Expose the lug bolts if necessary.
3. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up vehicle
The vehicle jack is designed for changing
wheels only.
The vehicle jack is designed for changing
wheels only. Do not attempt to raise another
vehicle model with it or to raise any load of any
kind. To do so could cause accidents and per‐
sonal injury.◀
1.
Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel.
The entire surface of the jack base must
rest on the ground vertically beneath the
jacking point.
2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular re‐
cess of the jacking point when cranking up.
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised from the ground.
Mounting the compact wheel
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
Seite 250
MOBILITY
Replacing components
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
3. Mount the new wheel.
4. Screw in at least two bolts crosswise.
5. Screw in the remaining lug bolts.
6. Fully tighten all lug bolts in a diagonal pat‐
tern.
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. Remove the jack.
Retightening the lug bolts
Retighten the lug bolts diagonally.
Checking that the lug bolts are tight
Always have the lug bolts checked with a
calibrated torque wrench as soon as possible to
ensure that they are tightened to the specified
torque. Otherwise, incorrectly tightened lug
bolts are a hidden safety risk.◀
The tightening torque equals
103.3 lb ft/140 Nm.
Replace the defective tire as soon as possible
and have the new wheel balanced.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery in tem‐
perate climate conditions.
The service center will be happy to answer any
questions on the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
Have the vehicle battery registered by the serv‐
ice center after it is replaced to ensure that all
comfort functions are available without restric‐
tions and that any associated Check Control
messages are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not connect the charger to the socket
Do not connect the battery charger to the
socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as
this could damage the battery.◀
Only charge the battery in the vehicle when the
engine is switched off. Connections, refer to
page 253.
General information
Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to
achieve the full battery life.
It may be necessary to charge the battery in
the following cases:
▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to
travel short distances.
▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for
more than one month.
Power failure
After a temporary power failure, some equip‐
ment will be restricted in its use and will need
to be reinitialized. In addition, certain individual
settings will be lost and must be updated:
▷ Time and date: the values must be up‐
dated, refer to page 78.
▷ Radio: the stations need to be stored again,
refer to page 161.
▷ Onboard monitor: full functionality will be
restored after some time.
Indicator/warning lights
Lights up red: the vehicle battery is no
longer being charged. Alternator mal‐
function.
Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers.
Have the battery checked immediately.
Seite 251
Replacing components
MOBILITY
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Lights up yellow: the battery charge
level is very low, the battery is old, or it
is not securely connected.
Charge the battery by taking a long drive or us‐
ing an external charger. If the indicators appear
again, have the battery checked as soon as
possible.
Disposing of old batteries
Have used batteries disposed of by the
service center after they are replaced or
take them to a recycling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
Fuses should be replaced by the service center.
Information on the fuses can be found on the
inside of the covers.
In the engine compartment
Opening the cover
Press the snap lock.
In interior
On the right side of the footwell.
Opening the cover
Push out at the recess.
Seite 252
MOBILITY
Replacing components
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Hazard warning flash‐
ers
The button is located on the speedometer.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the front on
the trunk floor.
First aid kit
Some of the articles contained in the first aid kit
have a limited service life. Therefore, check the
use-by dates of the contents regularly and re‐
place the items before they expire.
The first aid kit is located in the left side trim on
the cargo area floor.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. In the same way, you can
help jump-start another vehicle. Only use
jumper cables with fully insulated clamp han‐
dles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
nents while the engine is running.◀
Seite 253
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in‐
formation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there
is a danger of shorting.◀
Connecting jumper cables
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
1. Open the battery cover in the engine com‐
partment to access the positive terminal.
2. Unlock the tabs of the positive terminal
cover on the left and right, arrows 1, and
raise the cover, arrow 2.
3. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or to a starting aid terminal of the
vehicle providing assistance.
4. Attach the second clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery of the vehicle to be started.
5. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of the vehicle providing as‐
sistance.
6. Attach the second clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
Seite 254
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
the battery, or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Body ground:
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at a slightly in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged
battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Notes
Observe applicable laws and regulations
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.◀
No additional passengers
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.◀
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the MINI.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀
Access to the screw thread
Push out the tow fitting cover at the appropri‐
ate recess in the bumper.
Front
Rear
John Cooper Works with aerodynamic bumper:
Pull out the tow fitting cover in the bumper in
the lower section, arrow.
Seite 255
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Being towed
Follow the towing instructions
Follow all towing instructions, or vehicle
damage or accidents may occur.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
available.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Steptronic transmission
Towing vehicles with a Steptronic trans‐
mission
Only transport vehicles with a Steptronic trans‐
mission on tow trucks or with raised front
wheels; otherwise, the transmission may be
damaged.◀
Towing with a tow bar
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than your vehicle, or it will not be possible to
control vehicle response.◀
Correctly attach the tow bar
Only secure the tow bar on the tow fit‐
tings; damage can occur when it is secured on
other parts of the vehicle.◀
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is attached offset.
Towing with a tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is
secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Seite 256
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Towing with a tow truck
Have the MINI transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Tow-starting
If possible, start the engine by jump-starting,
refer to page 253, it rather than tow-starting
the vehicle. Vehicles with a catalytic converter
should only be tow-started when the engine is
cold; vehicles with an automatic transmission
cannot be tow-started.
1.
Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 64.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch is depressed and then slowly release
the clutch. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Seite 257
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Care
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Car washes
Notes
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
Holding them too close or using excessively
high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐
age or preliminary damage that may then lead
to long-term damage.
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
pressure washer.◀
Do not direct steam or high-pressure washers
toward the labels applied by the manufacturer;
otherwise, damage may result.
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pres‐
sure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the seals of the retractable hardtop and
the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park Dis‐
tance Control, for instance, for extended peri‐
ods of time and only from a distance of at least
12 in/30 cm.◀
During the winter months
Ensure that the vehicle is washed more
frequently in winter. Intense soiling and road
salt can damage the vehicle.◀
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Regularly remove foreign bodies, such as
leaves, from the area of the windshield when
the hood is open.
Washing in automatic car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
Do not use automatic high-pressure washers;
otherwise, water may drip into the interior in
the area of the windows.
Before driving into the car wash, check whether
the system is suitable for your MINI. Note the
following points:
▷ Vehicle dimensions, refer to page 266.
▷ If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, re‐
fer to page 57.
▷ Maximum permissible tire width.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle chassis
could be damaged.◀
Preparations before driving into the car wash:
▷ Unscrew the road antenna.
▷ MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: retract the rear
spoiler.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor to avoid unin‐
tentional wiper activation.
Seite 258
MOBILITY
Care
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐
stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if
there is a risk that these may be damaged.
▷ Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock.
Steptronic transmission
Before driving into the car wash, note the fol‐
lowing to ensure that the vehicle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch the engine off.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock so that the vehicle can roll.
Hand car wash
If washing the vehicle by hand, use copious
quantities of water and car shampoo if neces‐
sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or a
washing brush by applying gentle pressure.
Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the
rain sensor to avoid unintentional wiper activa‐
tion or switch off the ignition.
Adhere to the local regulations regarding
washing cars by hand.
Headlights
Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caus‐
tic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled,
e.g., due to insects, with shampoo and rinse off
with copious quantities of water.
Thaw ice with a window deicer; do not use an
ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the outside and inside surfaces of the
windows and the mirror glasses with window
cleaner.
Do not clean mirror glass with cleaners contain‐
ing quartz.
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to
avoid streaking.
Wax and preservative residue and soiling on
the windows cause streaking during window
wiping and lead to premature wear on the
wiper blades and malfunctions of the rain sen‐
sor.
Vehicle care
Car care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi‐
cantly to vehicle value retention.
The manufacturer recommends using cleaning
and care products from MINI, since these have
been tested and approved.
Original MINI CareProducts have been tested
on materials, in the laboratory, and in the field,
and offer optimum care and protection for MINI
vehicles.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
to surface damage.◀
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health.◀
Seite 259
Care
MOBILITY
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Caring for the convertible top
The appearance and life of the convertible top
depend on proper care and operation.
Adhere to the following instructions:
▷ Do not fold the convertible top and stow it
in the convertible top box while it is wet or
frozen; otherwise, water marks, fabric
stains, and chafing may occur.
▷ If water marks nevertheless occur on the
headliner, these can be removed using a
microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.
▷ When parking the vehicle in an enclosed
space for lengthy periods, ensure that the
area is adequately ventilated.
▷ Remove bird droppings immediately as
their corrosive properties may damage the
convertible top and the rubber seals.
Stain removal
To remove stains from the convertible
top, do not use stain remover, paint thinner,
solvents, benzine, or similar substances. These
agents can destroy the rubber coating. Im‐
proper care and cleaning can cause the
convertible top and its seams to become per‐
meable to water.◀
To remove severe soiling, use a special
convertible top cleaner.
Follow the instructions for use from the manu‐
facturer.
Treat the convertible top with an impregnating
agent once a year.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: rear spoiler
box
To ensure that proper functioning of the rear
spoiler is not impaired, for example due to
leaves, snow or ice, clean the rear spoiler box
at regular intervals.
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to vehicle value reten‐
tion and protects the paintwork against the
long-term effects of paint-damaging substan‐
ces.
Environmental influences in areas with higher
air pollution or natural contaminants, such as
tree resin or pollen, can have an impact on the
vehicle paint. Therefore, it is important to tailor
the frequency and extent of your car care to
these influences.
Immediately remove especially aggressive sub‐
stances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird
droppings, to prevent damage to the paint‐
work.
Correcting paint damage
Depending on the severity of the damage, re‐
pair stone impact damage or scratches imme‐
diately to prevent rust formation.
The manufacturer recommends having paint
damage corrected with a professional repair
paint job according to factory specifications us‐
ing original MINI paint materials.
Preservation
Preservation is needed when water no longer
beads off of the clean paint surfaces. Only use
paint preservation products that contain car‐
nauba or synthetic waxes.
Caring for matte finishes
▷ Do not use paint cleaners or gloss protec‐
tion agents such as car wax.
▷ Do not polish the surface or use abrasive
products, as these may cause the finish to
become glossy.
Leather care
The leather processed by the manufacturer is a
high quality natural product. Light graininess is
a typical feature of natural leather.
Particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores
and folds, and lead to increased wear and pre‐
mature degradation of the leather surface.
Therefore, remove dust from the leather regu‐
larly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Seite 260
MOBILITY
Care
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Make especially sure that light-colored leather
is cleaned regularly as it is more susceptible to
soiling.
Twice a year, treat the leather with a leather lo‐
tion as dirt and grease will attack the protective
layer of the leather.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to re‐
move superficial soiling.
In case of heavy soiling, e.g., beverage stains,
use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in
combination with a suitable interior cleaner.
Follow the instructions on the container.
Clean the upholstery material down to the
seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid
rubbing the material vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Interior plastic parts
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces
▷ Lamp lenses
▷ Indicator covers
▷ Matte components
Clean with water and a solvent-free plastic
cleaner if necessary.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
to surface damage.◀
Rubber seals
Only treat with water or a rubber care product.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use silicone
sprays or other care products containing sili‐
cone; otherwise, noise and damage may result.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt. For additional treatment, use a chrome
polish.
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, only
use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value
of 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaners or a steam jet hot‐
ter than 140 ℉/60 ℃; otherwise, damage may
result. Adhere to the manufacturer instructions.
Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may de‐
stroy the protective coating of neighboring
components such as the brake disc.
Exterior sensors
The sensors on the outside of the vehicle, such
as for Park Distance Control, must be kept clean
and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully
functional.
Decorative trim
Clean decorative trims and fine wood compo‐
nents with a moist cloth only. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
No chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Seite 261
Care
MOBILITY
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Carpets/floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again when they are returned after being re‐
moved, such as for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed for cleaning.
If they are very dirty, clean with a microfiber
cloth and water or an interior cleaner. To pre‐
vent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Displays
To clean the displays, such as the radio or dis‐
play elements, use an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the
unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
CD/DVD drives
No cleaning CD
Do not use cleaning CDs; otherwise, parts
of the drive may become damaged.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
Seite 262
MOBILITY
Care
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Seite 263
Care
MOBILITY
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
FIND ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Note
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents, on informa‐
tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained
from the service center.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
MINI Coupe
MINI Coupe Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Width with mirrors inches/mm 74.5/1,892 74.5/1,892 74.5/1,892
Width without mirrors inches/mm 66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683
Height without roof antenna inches/mm 54.3/1,378 54.5/1,384 54.5/1,385
Length inches/mm 146.8/3,728 147.0/3,734 148.0/3,758
Wheelbase inches/mm 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 35.1/10.7 35.1/10.7 35.1/10.7
Seite 266
REFERENCE
Technical data
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
MINI Roadster
MINI Roadster Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Width with mirrors inches/mm 74.5/1,892 74.5/1,892 74.5/1,892
Width without mirrors inches/mm 66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683
Height without roof antenna inches/mm 54.5/1,384 54.7/1,390 54.8/1,391
Length inches/mm 146.8/3,728 147.0/3,734 148.0/3,758
Wheelbase inches/mm 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 35.1/10.7 35.1/10.7 35.1/10.7
MINI Convertible
MINI Convertible Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Width with mirrors inches/mm 75.3/1,913 75.3/1,913 75.3/1,913
Width without mirrors inches/mm 66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683
Height without roof antenna inches/mm 55.7/1,414 55.7/1,414 55.7/1,414
Length inches/mm 146.6/3,723 146.8/3,729 148.0/3,758
Wheelbase inches/mm 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 35.1/10.7 35.1/10.7 35.1/10.7
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
MINI Coupe
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,175/1,440 3,252/1,475 3,263/1,480
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,252/1,475 3,307/1,500 3,318/1,505
Load lbs/kg 507/230 507/230 507/230
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,786/810 1,885/855 1,896/860
Seite 267
Technical data
REFERENCE
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,863/845 1,940/880 1,951/885
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,411/640 1,411/640 1,411/640
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liter
9.9/280 9.9/280 9.9/280
MINI Roadster
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,241/1,470 3,329/1,510 3,340/1,515
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,318/1,505 3,373/1,530 3,395/1,540
Load lbs/kg 507/230 507/230 507/230
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,786/810 1,896/860 1,907/865
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,863/845 1,951/885 1,962/890
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,488/675 1,466/665 1,488/675
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liter
8.5/240 8.5/240 8.5/240
MINI Convertible
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,560/1,615 3,671/1,665 3,704/1,680
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,638/1,650 3,737/1,695 3,748/1,700
Load lbs/kg 816/370 816/370 816/370
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,863/845 1,951/885 1,973/895
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,940/880 2,017/915 2,017/915
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,786/810 1,786/810 1,797/815
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liter
4.4-23.3/125-660 4.4-23.3/125-660 4.4-23.3/125-660
Seite 268
REFERENCE
Technical data
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Short commands for voice
activation
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 24.
To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
The following short commands apply to vehi‐
cles equipped with a voice activation system.
They have no function in vehicles in which only
the mobile phone is operated using the voice.
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Opens the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Open the options. ›Options‹
Open the settings. ›Settings‹
Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹
Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹
Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹
Open the light. ›Lighting‹
Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹
Seite 270
REFERENCE
Short commands for voice activation
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Vehicle information
Computer
Function Command
Open the computer. ›Onboard info‹
Open the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹
Enter the address. ›Enter address‹
Enter the town/city. ›City‹
Enter the country. ›State‹
Enter the postal code. ›Postal Code‹
Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹
Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address. ›Home address‹
Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹
Open the route. ›Route information‹
Switch on the spoken instruction. ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Seite 271
Short commands for voice activation
REFERENCE
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Function Command
Switch off the spoken instruction. ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book. ›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹
Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹
Points of Interest. ›Points of interest‹
Map
Function Command
Display the map. ›Map‹
Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet. ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...meters. ›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale
100 meters
Scale...kilometers. ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map
scale 5 kilometers
Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale
5 miles
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹
Seite 272
REFERENCE
Short commands for voice activation
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Radio
FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,
93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. ›Radio‹
Open the FM stations. ›F M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹
Open a station. ›Select station‹
AM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐
quency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. ›A M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Satellite radio
Function Command
Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite
radio channel 2
Stored stations
Function Command
Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹
Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹
Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2
Seite 273
Short commands for voice activation
REFERENCE
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
CD/multimedia
CD drive
Function Command
Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5
or
›C D track ...‹ e. g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. ›C D on‹
Select a CD. ›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹
CD. ›C D‹
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. ›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹
Telephone
Function Command
Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹
Open the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹
Redialing. ›Redial‹
Display received calls. ›Received calls‹
Seite 274
REFERENCE
Short commands for voice activation
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Function Command
List of messages. ›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Office
Function Command
Open the Office menu. ›Office‹
Display Office Today. ›Current office‹
Display the contacts. ›Contacts‹
Display the messages. ›Messages‹
Display the calendar. ›Calendar‹
Display the tasks. ›Tasks‹
Display the reminders. ›Reminders‹
Contacts
Function Command
Select a name. ›Choose name‹
My contacts. ›My contacts‹
Open the contacts. ›Contacts‹
New contact. ›New contact‹
Seite 275
Short commands for voice activation
REFERENCE
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 100
Acoustic signal, refer to Check
Control 81
Activated charcoal filter with
automatic climate con‐
trol 112
Adaptive Light Control 86
Additional telephone 192
Additives, engine oil 237
Airbags 89
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 91
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated air mode, air condi‐
tioner 109
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated air mode, automatic
climate control 111
Air conditioning 108
Air conditioning mode, air
conditioner 108
Air conditioning mode, auto‐
matic climate control 110
Air distribution, air condi‐
tioner, manual 109
Air distribution, auto‐
matic 111
Air distribution, automatic cli‐
mate control, manual 112
Air distribution, individual 109
Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 112
Air flow rate for air condi‐
tioner 109
Air flow rate with automatic
climate control 111
Air pressure, refer to Tire infla‐
tion pressure 220
Air supply, air conditioner 108
Air supply, automatic climate
control 110
Alarm system 39
Alarm system, avoiding unin‐
tentional alarms 41
Alarm system, ending an
alarm 40
Alarm system, interior motion
sensor 41
Alarm system, tilt alarm sen‐
sor 40
Always Open Timer 76
AM/FM station 160
Ambient lighting 88
Announcement, navigation,
refer to Spoken instruc‐
tions 149
Antifreeze, washer fluid 69
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 100
Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐
namic Stability Control
DSC 100
Anti-theft protection 31
Appointments 207
Approved engine oils 237
Ashtray 114
Assistance, roadside 253
Assistance when driving off,
refer to Hill drive-off assis‐
tant 102
Assistance with starting en‐
gine, refer to Jump-start‐
ing 253
Audio playback 169
Audio playback, Blue‐
tooth 175
Automatic air distribution 111
Automatic air flow 111
Automatic car wash 258
Automatic climate con‐
trol 110
Automatic climate control, au‐
tomatic air distribution 111
Automatic, cruise control 105
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 84
Automatic rear spoiler 102
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 70
AUTO program with auto‐
matic climate control 111
AUX-IN port 171
Average fuel consumption 75
Average speed 75
Average speed, refer to Com‐
puter 74
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 54
Backrests, refer to Seats 53
Backup lights, bulb replace‐
ment 246
Balance 158
Bass 158
Battery disposal 39
Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐
tery 251
Battery, remote control 30
Battery replacement, remote
control 39
Belts, refer to Safety belts 55
Belt tensioners, refer to Safety
belts 55
Bi-xenon headlights 243
Black and white map dis‐
play 152
Bluetooth audio 175
Seite 276
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Bluetooth connection, activat‐
ing/deactivating, hands-free
system 183
Bluetooth connection, activat‐
ing/deactivating, mobile
phone preparation 193
Bluetooth hands-free sys‐
tem 182
Brake assistant 100
Brake discs, breaking in 124
Brake fluid, refer to Service re‐
quirements 80
Brake force distribution, elec‐
tronic 100
Brake pads, breaking in 124
Brake, refer to Parking
brake 66
Brakes, MINI maintenance
system 239
Brakes, service require‐
ments 80
Brake system, MINI mainte‐
nance system 239
Braking, notes 126
Braking, parking brake 66
Breakdown assistance, Road‐
side Assistance 253
Breaking in 124
Brightness on the Control Dis‐
play 79
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/Stop button 64
C
Calendar 207
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 251
Car care products 259
Care, displays 262
Care, vehicle 259
Cargo area, Comfort Ac‐
cess 38
Cargo area door, refer to Tail‐
gate 35
Cargo area, emergency opera‐
tion, refer to Unlocking man‐
ually 36
Cargo area, emergency un‐
locking 37
Cargo area light, refer to Inte‐
rior lights 87
Cargo area, opening from the
outside 35
Car horn, refer to Horn 12
Carpet, care 262
Car phone, refer to Tele‐
phone 182
Car phone, refer to Telephone,
mobile phone prepara‐
tion 192
Car wash 258
CBC, Cornering Brake Con‐
trol 100
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 239
CD 168
CD/DVD drives, care 262
CD player 168
Center console, refer to
Around the center con‐
sole 16
Central locking, Comfort Ac‐
cess 37
Central locking from the in‐
side 35
Central locking system, con‐
cept 31
Central locking system, from
the outside 31
Central screen, see Control
Display 18
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 6
Changing wheels/tires 229
Check Control 81
Children, transporting 59
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 61
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tems 59
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 59
Child seat, mounting 59
Child seats, refer to Transport‐
ing children safely 59
Chrome parts, care 261
Circulation of air, refer to Re‐
circulated air mode, air con‐
ditioner 109
Circulation of air, refer to Re‐
circulated air mode, auto‐
matic climate control 111
Cleaning, displays 262
Cleaning, refer to Care 258
Climate 108
Climate mode, ventila‐
tion 113
Clock 73
Clock, 12h/24h format 78
Clock, setting the time and
date 78
Clock, setting the time
zone 78
Closing from the inside 35
Closing, from the outside 32
Clutch, breaking in 124
Cockpit 12
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 65
Combination instrument, refer
to Displays 14
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signal/high-beams/
headlight flasher 67
Combination switch, refer to
Washer/wiper system 67
Comfort Access 37
Comfort Access, in the car
wash 39
Comfort Access, replacing the
battery 39
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 16
Seite 277
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Compact wheel, inflation pres‐
sure 225
Compartment for remote con‐
trol, refer to Ignition lock 64
Computer 74
Computer, displaying informa‐
tion 74
Condition Based Service
CBS 239
Confirmation signals for vehi‐
cle locking/unlocking 33
Connecting, mobile phone, re‐
fer to Mobile phone, pairing,
hands-free system 183
Connecting, mobile phone, re‐
fer to Pairing the mobile
phone 193
Consumption, refer to Aver‐
age fuel consumption 75
Contacts for hands-free sys‐
tem 189
Contacts, office 204
Control Display 18
Control Display, care 262
Control Display, settings 79
Controls and displays 12
Control systems, driving stabil‐
ity 100
Convenient operation, win‐
dow 32
Convertible top 42
Convertible top, manual 47
Convertible top, mechani‐
cal 47
Coolant temperature 74
Cooling function, switching on
and off 112
Cooling, maximum 112
Cornering Brake Control,
CBC 100
Corrosion on brake discs 126
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone, refer to Snap-in
adapter 202
Cruise control 105
Cupholders 114
Current fuel consumption 75
Current location, storing 140
Curve lights, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 86
D
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 87
Dashboard, refer to Cock‐
pit 12
Dashboard, refer to Dis‐
plays 14
Date, date format 79
Date, setting 78
Daytime running lights 85
Decorative trim, care 261
Defogging windows 109
Defroster, rear window, auto‐
matic climate control 112
Defroster, rear window, with
air conditioner 109
Defrosting windows 109
Defrost setting, refer to De‐
frosting windows 109
Destination entry via the ad‐
dress book 140
Destination guidance with in‐
termediate destinations 145
Destination input, naviga‐
tion 138
Digital radio 162
Dip stick, engine oil 236
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 67
Display lighting, refer to In‐
strument lighting 87
Displays 14
Displays and controls 12
Displays, care 262
Displays, cleaning 262
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 14
Disposal, remote control bat‐
tery 39
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 106
Door key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 30
Door lock 34
Door lock, confirmation sig‐
nals 33
Doors, manual operation 35
Doors, unlocking and locking,
confirmation signals 33
Doors, unlocking and locking
from the inside 35
Doors, unlocking and locking,
from the outside 32
DOT Quality Grades 227
Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill
drive-off assistant 102
Driving notes, breaking
in 124
Driving off on hills, refer to Hill
drive-off assistant 102
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 100
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 124
Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐
tion 112
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 100
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 101
DTMF suffix dialing, hands-
free system 185
DTMF suffix dialing, mobile
phone preparation pack‐
age 197
Dynamic destination guid‐
ance 154
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 100
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 101
Seite 278
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
E
Electrical convertible top 43
Electrical malfunction,
convertible top 44, 51
Electrical malfunction, door
lock 35
Electrical malfunction, fuel
filler flap 216
Electrical malfunction, tail‐
gate 36
Electronic brake-force distri‐
bution 100
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil‐
ity Control DSC 100
Emergency operation, fuel
filler flap, unlocking man‐
ually 216
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation 35
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation of
convertible top 44, 51
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation, tail‐
gate 36
Emergency operation, Step‐
tronic transmission, refer to
Selector lever lock, overrid‐
ing 72
Emergency unlocking 37
Energy, saving, refer to Saving
fuel 131
Engine, breaking in 124
Engine compartment 234
Engine oil, adding 236
Engine oil, additives, refer to
Approved engine oils 237
Engine oil, alternative oil
types 237
Engine oil change intervals,
refer to Service require‐
ments 80
Engine oil, dip stick 236
Engine oil, filling capacity 269
Engine oil, MINI maintenance
system 239
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 237
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 237
Engine, overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 74
Engine start, assistance 253
Engine, starting 65
Engine, starting, Comfort Ac‐
cess 37
Engine, starting, Start/Stop
button 64
Engine, stopping, Start/Stop
button 64
Engine, switching off 66
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control DSC 100
Exchanging wheels/tires 229
Exterior mirrors 57
Exterior mirrors, adjusting 57
Exterior mirrors, folding in and
out 57
Exterior sensors, care 261
External devices 171
External temperature dis‐
play 73
External temperature display,
changing the unit of meas‐
ure 77
External temperature display,
on onboard computer 77
External temperature warn‐
ing 73
F
Fader 158
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 81
False alarm, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 41
Fan, refer to Air flow rate for
air conditioner 109
Fan, refer to Air flow rate with
automatic climate con‐
trol 111
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 55
Fault messages, refer to Check
Control 81
Filling capacities 269
Filter, refer to Activated-char‐
coal filter 110
Filter, refer to Microfilter 110
Filter, refer to Microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter with au‐
tomatic climate control 112
First aid kit 253
First aid, refer to First aid
kit 253
Flashing when locking/unlock‐
ing 33
Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor 93
Flat tire, indicator/warning
lamp 93
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 92
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, flat tire
message 93
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, initializ‐
ing the system 93
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow
chains 92
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, system
limits 92
Flat tire, run-flat tire 94
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 94
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 94
Flat tire, wheel change 248
Floor mats, care 262
FM/AM station 160
Fog lights 86
Folding roof, refer to
Convertible top with
integrated sliding sun‐
roof 42
Foot brake 126
Seite 279
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Footwell lights, refer to Inte‐
rior lights 87
Front airbags 89
Front fog light, bulb replace‐
ment 245
Front fog lights 86
Front lights, bulb replace‐
ment 243
Front passenger airbags, de‐
activating 90
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 92
Fuel 218
Fuel, additives 218
Fuel, average consump‐
tion 75
Fuel cap, closing 216
Fuel consumption display,
average fuel consump‐
tion 75
Fuel filler flap, closing 216
Fuel filler flap, opening 216
Fuel filler flap, unlocking in
case of an electrical malfunc‐
tion 216
Fuel gauge 74
Fuel, refer to Average fuel
consumption 75
Fuel, saving 131
Fuel tank capacity, refer to
Filling capacities 269
Fuel tank contents, refer to
Filling capacities 269
Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐
pacities 269
Fuse 252
G
Gasoline 218
Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel
gauge 74
Gas station recommenda‐
tion 149
Gear change, manual trans‐
mission 70
Gear change, Steptronic trans‐
mission 71
Gear display, Steptronic trans‐
mission 70
Glare protection 114
GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐
gation system 136
H
Halogen headlights, bulb re‐
placement 244
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 66
Hand car wash, care 259
Hands-free microphone 16
Hands-free system 182
Hazard warning system 16
HD Radio 162
Head airbags 89
Headlamp control, refer to
Parking lamps/low
beams 84
Headlamps, care 259
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 84
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 85
Headlight flasher 67
Headlight flasher, indicator
lamp 15
Headlights 84
Headlights, cleaning, washer
fluid 69
Head restraints 56
Head restraints, adjusting the
height 56
Head restraints, removing 56
Heatable rear window, air
conditioner 109
Heatable windshield 112
Heating, rear window with au‐
tomatic climate control 112
Heating, seats 55
Heating, windshield 112
Height adjustment, seats 53
High-beams 85
High beams, bulb replace‐
ment 244
High-beams, indicator
lamp 15
Hill drive-off assistant 102
Hills 126
Holder for remote control, re‐
fer to Ignition lock 64
Homepage 6
Hood 235
Hood, closing 235
Hood, opening 235
Hood, unlocking 235
Horn 12
House number, entering for
navigation 139
Hydraulic brake assistant 100
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 73
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 73
Identification marks, run-flat
tires 230
Identification marks, tires 226
iDrive, changing settings 79
iDrive, changing the date and
time 78
iDrive, changing the lan‐
guage 79
iDrive, changing the units of
measure and display for‐
mat 77
iDrive, setting the bright‐
ness 79
Ignition 65
Ignition key position 1, refer
to Radio ready state 64
Ignition key position 2, refer
to Ignition on 65
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 30
Seite 280
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Ignition lock 64
Ignition, switched off 65
Ignition, switched on 65
Indicator and warning lamps,
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 95
Indicator and warning
lights 15
Individual air distribution 109
Inflation pressure monitor, re‐
fer to Flat Tire Monitor 92
Inflation pressure monitor, re‐
fer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 94
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 220
Information on the navigation
data 136
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 93
Initializing, refer to Setting the
time and date 78
Instrument cluster, refer to
Displays 14
Instrument lighting 87
Instruments, refer to Cock‐
pit 12
Integrated key 30
Interactive map 143
Interior lights 87
Interior lights, remote con‐
trol 33
Interior mirror 58
Interior motion sensor 41
Interior temperature, setting,
air conditioner 108
Interior temperature, setting,
automatic climate con‐
trol 110
Internet page 6
Intersection, entering for navi‐
gation 139
J
Jump-starting 253
K
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 37
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 37
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 31
Key, refer to Remote control
with integrated key 30
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 71
Knocking control 218
L
Lamp and bulb replacement,
bulb replacement 242
Lamp, replacing, refer to
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment 242
Lamps 84
Lamps, automatic headlight
control 84
Language, changing on the
Control Display 79
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 55
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 61
Leather, care 260
Leather care 260
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 243
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 22
License plate light, bulb re‐
placement 246
Light-alloy wheels, care 261
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 243
Lighter, socket 115
Lighting, instruments 87
Lighting, lamp and bulb re‐
placement 242
Lighting, vehicle, refer to
Lamps 84
Lights, parking lamps/low
beams 84
Light switch 84
Limit, refer to Speed limit 98
Lock buttons on doors, refer
to Locking 35
Locking from the inside 35
Locking, from the outside 33
Locking, setting the confirma‐
tion signal 33
Locking the vehicle from the
inside 35
Locking vehicle, from the out‐
side 32
Locking without remote con‐
trol, refer to Comfort Ac‐
cess 37
Longlife oils, alternative oil
types 237
Longlife oils, refer to Ap‐
proved engine oils 237
Low beams 84
Low beams, automatic 84
Low beams, bulb replace‐
ment 244
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 54
Luggage compartment lid, re‐
fer to Tailgate 35
Luggage compartment, refer
to Cargo area 35
Lumbar support 54
M
Main inspection, refer to Serv‐
ice requirements 80
Maintenance, refer to Service
booklet
Maintenance, refer to Service
requirements 80
Maintenance require‐
ments 239
Seite 281
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Maintenance system
MINI 239
Makeup mirror 114
Malfunction, convertible
top 44, 51
Malfunction, door lock 35
Malfunction, fuel filler
flap 216
Malfunction, Steptronic trans‐
mission 72
Malfunction, tailgate 36
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 81
Manual air distribution, air
conditioner 109
Manual air distribution, auto‐
matic climate control 112
Manual convertible top 47
Manual mode, Steptronic
transmission 71
Manual operation, door
lock 35
Manual operation, electrical
convertible top 44, 51
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 216
Manual operation, selector
lever lock, Steptronic trans‐
mission 72
Manual operation, tailgate 36
Map, destination entry 143
Map display in black and
white 152
Map view 150
Marking on approved
tires 229
Maximum cooling 112
Maximum speed, winter
tires 230
Mechanical convertible
top 47
Menu operation, onboard
monitor 18
Menus, refer to Onboard
monitor operating con‐
cept 19
Message list, traffic bulle‐
tins 151
Messages 206
Microfilter 110
Microfilter, with automatic cli‐
mate control 112
MINI Connected 211
MINI Homepage 6
MINI Internet page 6
MINI maintenance sys‐
tem 239
MINI Mobility System 231
Minimum tread, tires 228
Mirrors 57
Mirrors, folding in and out 57
Mirrors, interior mirror 58
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 125
Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐
phone, mobile phone prepa‐
ration 192
Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐
phone with hands-free sys‐
tem 182
Mobile phone with hands-free
system 182
Mobile phone with mobile
phone preparation 192
Mobility System 231
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 6
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 59
MP3 player 171
N
Navigation 136
Navigation data 136
Navigation data, updat‐
ing 136
Navigation system, destina‐
tion entry by voice 144
Neck restraints, refer to Head
restraints 56
New wheels and tires 229
Notes 6, 208
Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐
tion 113
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 240
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
sis 240
Octane number, refer to Fuel
quality 218
Octane rating, refer to Recom‐
mended fuel grade 218
Odometer 73
Office 203
Oil additives 237
Oil level 236
Oil types, alternative 237
Oil types, approved 237
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 240
Onboard monitor 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 241
Opening and closing, Comfort
Access 37
Opening and closing from the
inside 35
Opening and closing, from the
outside 32
Opening and closing, using
the door lock 34
Opening and closing, via the
remote control 32
Opening and unlocking from
the inside 35
Operating concept of the on‐
board monitor 18
Outside air mode, automatic
climate control 111
Seite 282
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Outside air, refer to Recircu‐
lated air mode, air condi‐
tioner 109
Outside air, refer to Recircu‐
lated air mode, automatic
climate control 111
Overheating of engine, refer
to Coolant temperature 74
P
Pairing, mobile phone 193
Pairing, mobile phone, hands-
free system 183
Park Distance Control
PDC 106
Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 106
Parking assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 106
Parking brake 66
Parking light, bulb replace‐
ment 245
Parking lights 84
Parking lights/low beams 84
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 106
Personal information 203
Personal Profile 31
Pivoting sun visor 114
Plastic, care 261
Pollen, refer to Microfilter 110
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 110
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter with
automatic climate con‐
trol 112
Position, storing 140
Postal code, entering in navi‐
gation 139
Power windows, initializ‐
ing 42
Power windows, refer to Win‐
dows 41
Prescribed engine oils, refer to
Approved engine oils 237
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 94
Pressure, tires 220
Pressure warning, tires 92
Profile depth, refer to Mini‐
mum tread depth 228
Profile, tires 227
R
Radio 160
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control with
integrated key 30
Radio ready state 64
Radio ready state, switched
off 65
Radio ready state, switched
on 64
Radio setting, refer to Radio
ready state 64
Rain sensor 68
Random 169
Random playback 169
Range 75
RDS 161
Reading out loud 209
Rear fog light 87
Rear fog light, bulb replace‐
ment 246
Rear fog lights, indicator
lamp 15
Rear lights, refer to Tail
lights 246
Rear spoiler 102
Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐
rors 57
Rear window defroster with
air conditioner 109
Rear window defroster with
automatic climate con‐
trol 112
Recirculated air mode, air
conditioner 109
Recirculated air mode, auto‐
matic climate control 111
Recommended fuel
grade 218
Recommended tire
brands 229
Redialing, hands-free sys‐
tem 185
Redialing, mobile phone prep‐
aration package 197
Releasing, refer to Unlock‐
ing 38
Remaining range for service,
refer to Service require‐
ments 80
Remaining range, refer to
Range 75
Reminders 209
Remote control 30
Remote control, battery re‐
placement 39
Remote control, Comfort Ac‐
cess 37
Remote control, Comfort Ac‐
cess, malfunctions 39
Remote control, radio interfer‐
ence 33
Remote control, removing
from the ignition lock 64
Remote control, service
data 239
Remote control, tailgate 33
Remote inquiry, hands-free
system 185
Remote inquiry, mobile phone
preparation package 197
Replacement remote con‐
trol 30
Replacing wheels/tires 229
Reporting safety defects 9
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 74
Seite 283
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐
fer to Washer fluid reser‐
voir 69
Restraining systems, refer to
Safety belts 55
Restraint systems for chil‐
dren 59
Retreaded tires 229
Reverse gear, manual trans‐
mission 70
Road, avoiding 147
Road detour 147
Roadside Assistance 253
Roadside parking light, bulb
replacement 245
Roadside parking lights 85
RON recommended fuel
grade 218
RON, refer to Fuel quality 218
Route 148
Route criteria, route 147
Route, displaying 148
Route section, bypassing 148
Rubber seals, care 261
Run-flat tires 230
Run-flat tires, flat tire 93
Run-flat tires, tire inflation
pressure 220
S
Safe braking 126
Safety 6
Safety belts 55
Safety belts, care 261
Safety belts, damage 56
Safety belts, indicator/warning
lamp 56
Safety belts, reminder 56
Safety systems, airbags 89
Safety systems, safety
belts 55
Satellite radio 162
Saving fuel 131
Scale, changing during navi‐
gation 151
Screen, see Control Display 18
Seat adjustment, manual 53
Seat heating 55
Seats 53
Seats, adjusting 53
Seats, heating 55
Seats, sitting safely 53
Selector lever lock, overrid‐
ing 72
Selector lever lock, refer to Se‐
lector level positions, chang‐
ing, shiftlock 71
Selector lever positions, Step‐
tronic transmission 71
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 71
Service and warranty 7
Service data in the remote
control 239
Service interval display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 239
Service interval display, refer
to Service requirements 80
Service requirements 80
Service requirements, CBS
Condition Based Service 239
Settings and information 76
Settings, changing on the
Control Display 79
Settings, clock, 12h/24h
mode 78
Settings, configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 31
Settings, language 79
Shifting, manual transmis‐
sion 70
Shifting, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 71
Shift lever, Steptronic trans‐
mission 71
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 72
Short commands, voice acti‐
vation 270
Side airbags 89
Side windows, refer to Win‐
dows 41
Sitting safely 53
Slot for remote control 64
Snap-in adapter, mobile
phone 202
Snow chains 233
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagno‐
sis 240
Software applications,
iPhone 211
Software part number, hands-
free system 182
Software part number, mobile
phone preparation 192
Software update 178
Special destinations, naviga‐
tion 142
Special equipment, series
equipment 6
Speed, average 75
Speed limit 98
Speed limit, setting 98
Speedometer 14
Speed, with winter tires 230
Spoken instructions, naviga‐
tion 149
Sport button 102
Sport program, Steptronic
transmission 71
Stability control systems 100
Start/Stop button 64
Start/Stop button, starting the
engine 65
Start/Stop button, switching
off the engine 66
Starting the engine 65
Start problems, refer to Jump-
starting 253
State/province, selecting for
navigation 138
Stations, stored 167
Station, storing 161
Status information, onboard
monitor 21
Steering wheel 58
Seite 284
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Steering wheel, adjusting 58
Steering wheel lock 64
Steering wheel, shift pad‐
dles 72
Steptronic transmission 70
Steptronic transmission, kick‐
down 71
Steptronic transmission, over‐
riding the selector lever
lock 72
Stopping, engine 66
Storage, tires 230
Storing the vehicle 262
Street, entering for naviga‐
tion 139
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 220
Summer tires, tread 227
Sun visor 114
Switches, refer to Cockpit 12
Switching off, engine 66
Switching off, vehicle 66
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 74
Tailgate 35
Tailgate, Comfort Access 38
Tailgate, emergency opera‐
tion 37
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 37
Tailgate, opening/closing 35
Tailgate, opening from the
outside 35
Tailgate, unlocking man‐
ually 36
Tailgate, unlocking with re‐
mote control 33
Tail lights 246
Tank gauge, refer to Fuel
gauge 74
Tasks 208
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 6
Telephone, adjusting the vol‐
ume, hands-free system 185
Telephone, adjusting the vol‐
ume, mobile phone prepara‐
tion package 197
Telephone, hands-free sys‐
tem 182
Telephone, mobile phone
preparation 192
Temperature, air condi‐
tioner 109
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 112
Temperature, changing the
unit of measure 77
Temperature, coolant, refer to
Coolant temperature 74
Temperature display
–
External temperature warn‐
ing 73
Temperature display, external
temperature 73
Temperature display, setting
the units 77
Temperature warning 73
Text messages 206
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 39
Tilt alarm sensor 40
Time, setting the time 78
Tire age 228
Tire, flat tire 93
Tire identification marks 226
Tire inflation pressure 220
Tire inflation pressure, pres‐
sure loss, FTM 93
Tire pressure loss, RDC 95
Tire, pressure monitoring, re‐
fer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 94
Tire pressure monitor, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 92
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 94
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,
system limits 97
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,
system reset 95
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,
warning lamp 95
Tire Quality Grading 227
Tires, breaking in 124
Tires, changing 229
Tires, condition 227
Tires, damage 228
Tire size 226
Tires, minimum tread 228
Tires, retreaded tires 229
Tires, storage 230
Tire tread 227
Toll roads, route 147
Tone 158
Tool kit, refer to Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 241
Tools, refer to Onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit 241
Towing another vehicle 255
Towing, being towed 255
Town/city, navigation 138
Tow-starting 255
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
Traction control 101
Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
tion 151
Transmission lock, refer to
Changing the selector lever
positions 71
Transmission, overriding the
selector lever lock with Step‐
tronic transmission 72
Transmission, refer to Manual
transmission 70
Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 70
Transporting children
safely 59
Treble, tone 158
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 73
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 67
Seite 285
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
Trip odometer 73
Trips, planning 145
Trunk lid, emergency opera‐
tion, refer to Unlocking man‐
ually 36
Trunk, opening from the in‐
side 36
Turning lights, refer to Adap‐
tive Light Control 86
Turn signal, bulb replace‐
ment 245
Turn signal indicator lamp 14
Turn signals 67
Turn signals, triple turn signal
activation 67
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQG 227
Unintentional alarms, avoid‐
ing 41
Units, average fuel consump‐
tion 77
Units of measure, changing on
the Control Display 77
Units, temperature 77
Unlocking from the inside 35
Unlocking, from the out‐
side 32
Unlocking, tailgate 38
Unlocking, without remote
control, refer to Comfort Ac‐
cess 37
Update, software 178
Upholstery care 261
Upholstery material care 261
V
Vanity mirror 114
Vehicle battery 251
Vehicle, breaking in 124
Vehicle care 259
Vehicle care, refer to
Care 258
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle identification number,
hands-free system 182
Vehicle identification number,
mobile phone prepara‐
tion 192
Vehicle paintwork, care 260
Vehicle storage 262
Vehicle, switching off 66
Vehicle wash 258
Ventilation, air condi‐
tioner 113
Version of the navigation
data 136
Video playback, iPhone 174
Video playback, snap-in
adapter 174
Voice activation, naviga‐
tion 144
Voice activation, short com‐
mands 270
Voice activation system 24
Volume, setting 158
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 15
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 81
Warning signal volumes 158
Warning triangle 253
Washer/wiper system 67
Washer/wiper system, rain
sensor 68
Washer/wiper system, washer
fluid 69
Washer fluid 69
Washer fluid reservoir 69
Washing, vehicle 258
Welcome lights 85
Wheel change 248
Wheels and tires 220
Wheels, changing 229
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 92
Wind baffle, refer to Wind de‐
flector 46, 51
Wind deflector 46, 51
Window, closing 41
Window, convenient opera‐
tion 32
Window, opening 41
Windows 41
Windows, care 259
Windows, defrosting and de‐
fogging 109
Windshield defroster 112
Windshield, defrosting and
defogging 109
Windshield, defrosting, refer
to Defrosting windows 109
Windshield wash 67
Windshield washer fluid 69
Windshield wash, reservoir for
washer fluid 69
Windshield wash, washer
fluid 69
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 241
Windshield wiper, refer to
Washer/wiper system 67
Winter storage, care 262
Winter tires 229
Winter tires, setting the speed
limit 98
Winter tires, tread 228
Wiper blades, care 259
Wiper blades, changing 241
Wiper fluid 69
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 23
Y
Your individual vehicle, set‐
tings, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 31
Seite 286
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
01 40 2 961 056 ue
*BL2961056003*
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 056 - II/15
